Nemo Outdoor 9.10 User Guide

Keysight Nemo Outdoor
User Guide
Notices
U.S.Government Rights Warranty
Copyright Notice
The Software is “commercial computer THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS
© Keysight Technologies, Inc. 2018-2021 software,” as defined by Federal DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED “AS IS,”
No part of this manual may be Acquisition Regulation (“FAR”) 2.101. AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING
reproduced in any form or by any means Pursuant to FAR 12.212 and 27.405-3 CHANGED, WITHOUT NOTICE, IN
(including electronic storage and retrieval and Department of Defense FAR FUTURE EDITIONS. FURTHER, TO
or translation into a foreign language) Supplement (“DFARS”) 227.7202, the THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
without prior agreement and written U.S. government acquires commercial BY APPLICABLE LAW, KEYSIGHT
consent from Keysight Technologies, as computer software under the same DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES,
governed by United States and terms by which the software is EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH
international copyright laws. customarily provided to the public. REGARD TO THIS MANUAL AND ANY
Accordingly, Keysight provides the INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN,
Manual Part Number Software to U.S. government INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
customers under its standard IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
NTA00000A-90012 commercial license, which is embodied MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
in its End User License Agreement FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Edition (EULA), a copy of which can be found KEYSIGHT SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
at FOR ERRORS OR FOR INCIDENTAL
Edition 1, October 2021
Documents Software Version 9.10 http://www.keysight.com/find/s OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
weula. The license set forth in the CONNECTION WITH THE
Published by: EULA represents the exclusive FURNISHING, USE, OR
Keysight Technologies Finland, Ltd. authority by which the U.S. PERFORMANCE OF THIS DOCUMENT
Elektroniikkatie 10 government may use, modify, OR ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED
90590 Oulu distribute, or disclose the Software. HEREIN. SHOULD KEYSIGHT AND
The EULA and the license set forth THE USER HAVE A SEPARATE
WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH
Technology Licenses therein, does not require or permit,
WARRANTY TERMS COVERING THE
among other things, that Keysight: (1)
Furnish technical information related to MATERIAL IN THIS DOCUMENT THAT
The hardware and/or software described
commercial computer software or CONFLICT WITH THESE TERMS, THE
in this document are furnished under a
commercial computer software WARRANTY TERMS IN THE
license and may be used or copied only
documentation that is not customarily SEPARATE AGREEMENT WILL
in accordance with the terms of such
provided to the public; or (2) CONTROL.
license.
Relinquish to, or otherwise provide,
the government rights in excess of
Declaration of Conformity these rights customarily provided to
Declarations of Conformity for this product the public to use, modify, reproduce,
and for other Keysight products may be release, perform, display, or disclose
downloaded from the Web. Go to commercial computer software or
http://www.keysight.com/go/confor commercial computer software
mity documentation. No additional
government requirements beyond
and click on “Declarations of Conformity.”
those set forth in the EULA shall apply,
You can then search by product number to
except to the extent that those terms,
find the latest Declaration of Conformity.
rights, or licenses are explicitly
required from all providers of
commercial computer software
pursuant to the FAR and the DFARS
and are set forth specifically in writing
elsewhere in the EULA. Keysight shall A WARNING notice denotes a hazard. It
be under no obligation to update, calls attention to an operating procedure,
revise or otherwise modify the practice, or the like that, if not correctly
Software. With respect to any performed or adhered to, could result in
technical data as defined by FAR personal injury or death. Do not proceed
2.101, beyond a WARNING notice until the
pursuant to FAR 12.211 and 27.404.2 indicated conditions are fully understood
and DFARS 227.7102, the U.S. and met.
government acquires no greater than
Limited Rights as defined in FAR
27.401 or DFAR 227.7103-5 (c), as
applicable in any technical data.
2
Is the software of your measurement products up-to-date?
Keysight will periodically release software updates to fix known defects and incorporate product
enhancements. To search for software updates for your product, go to the Keysight Software
Manager website at:
www.keysight.com/find/softwaremanager
3
Table of Contents
1 Quick Guide ............................................................................................................................................... 10

1.1 Setting up the system...................................................................................................10
1.2 Using Nemo Outdoor ...................................................................................................11
1.2.1 Using Nemo Outdoor with command line options ................................................ 12
2 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................................... 13
2.1 Licensing ......................................................................................................................13
2.1.1 Technical support expiration................................................................................. 13
2.2 Important ......................................................................................................................13
2.2.1 Local laws and regulations ................................................................................... 14
2.2.2 Nemo Outdoor laptop settings .............................................................................. 14
2.2.3 Traffic safety.......................................................................................................... 16
2.2.4 Operating environment ......................................................................................... 16
3 Nemo Outdoor System Overview..................................................................................................... 17
3.1 Voice testing .................................................................................................................17
3.2 Circuit-switched data testing ........................................................................................17
3.3 Packet-switched data testing .......................................................................................17
3.4 Nemo Active Testing Application (NATA) ....................................................................18
3.4.1 Installing NATA ..................................................................................................... 18
3.4.2 Updating the NATA SW and license .................................................................... 20
3.4.3 Low data throughput with NATA ........................................................................... 21
3.4.4 TeamViewer QuickSupport for NATA................................................................... 22
3.4.5 Local NATA software updates .............................................................................. 23
3.4.6 NATA IMS video call quality option license .......................................................... 24
3.5 Nemo Carrying Case....................................................................................................25
3.6 Nemo Network Benchmarking Solution .......................................................................26
3.7 Indoor measurements ..................................................................................................27
4 Installing Nemo Outdoor System ...................................................................................................... 28
4.1 Hardware and software requirements..........................................................................28
4.2 Other hardware requirements ......................................................................................28
4.3 Nemo Outdoor software installation.............................................................................29
4.4 Over-the-air SW updates .............................................................................................30
4.5 Nemo Outdoor device set-up .......................................................................................30
4.5.1 Connecting a GPS receiver .................................................................................. 31
4.5.2 Connecting a scanner ........................................................................................... 31
4.5.3 Connecting voice quality devices ......................................................................... 32
4.6 Nemo Invex device set-up............................................................................................35
4.6.1 Nemo Invex Status view ....................................................................................... 38
4.6.2 Multiple data connections on one measurement server ...................................... 42
4.7 General guidelines for drive testing .............................................................................42
4
Nemo Outdoor User Guide
5 Configuration Settings ........................................................................................................................... 44

5.1 Configuring Nemo Outdoor ..........................................................................................44
5.1.1 Configuration through Welcome page .................................................................. 44
5.1.2 Configuration through Load Device Configuration dialog .................................... 47
5.1.3 Configuring Nemo Outdoor manually ................................................................... 49
5.1.4 Use case 1. Start measurements automatically upon device startup.................. 49
5.2 Configuring test mobiles...............................................................................................50
5.3 Configuration Manager.................................................................................................51
5.3.1 Configuration Manager - Handler information ...................................................... 51
5.3.2 Configuration Manager - User interface ............................................................... 52
5.3.3 Configuration Manager - Notifications .................................................................. 64
5.3.4 Configuration Manager - Scripts ........................................................................... 67
5.3.5 Configuration Manager - Device configurations ................................................... 68
5.3.6 Configuration Manager - Devices ......................................................................... 68
5.3.7 Configuration Manager - View groups .................................................................. 74
5.3.8 Configuration Manager - Workspaces .................................................................. 75
5.4 Measurement Properties dialog ...................................................................................75
5.4.1 Measurement Properties – General ..................................................................... 76
5.4.2 Measurement Properties – Measurement ............................................................ 77
5.4.3 Measurement Properties – Frequency scanning with mobiles ............................ 83
5.4.4 Measurement Properties – Pilot scanning with mobiles ...................................... 86
5.4.5 Measurement Properties – Frequency, pilot, and spectrum scanning with
scanners ..............................................................................................................................87
5.4.6 Measurement Properties - Script .......................................................................... 87
6 During Measurements ........................................................................................................................... 89
6.1 Textual notes ................................................................................................................90
6.2 Nemo Cloud..................................................................................................................90
6.2.1 Changing the priority order of network interfaces ................................................ 93
6.2.2 Work orders........................................................................................................... 95
6.3 Making scanning measurements .................................................................................96
6.4 Making voice calls ........................................................................................................96
6.4.1 Voice Call Settings ................................................................................................ 98
6.5 Custom application calls ............................................................................................101
6.6 Push-to-Talk (PTT) testing .........................................................................................102
6.6.1 Kodiak Push-to-Talk............................................................................................ 102
6.7 Voice quality measurements ......................................................................................106
6.7.1 System description - mobile-to-fixed line............................................................ 106
6.7.2 System description - mobile-to-mobile ............................................................... 107
6.7.3 Nemo Server remote configuration .................................................................... 107
6.7.4 Nemo Server settings ......................................................................................... 108
6.7.5 Mute call detection .............................................................................................. 110
5
6.7.6 Test sample requirements .................................................................................. 112

6.7.7 Simultaneous PESQ and POLQA measurements ............................................. 113
6.7.8 Mobile-to-mobile VQ measurements .................................................................. 113
6.7.9 Mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile VQ measurements..................................................... 118
6.7.10 End-to-end call instructions ................................................................................ 121
6.8 Video quality monitoring .............................................................................................127
6.9 Making video calls ......................................................................................................128
6.10 Data transfers .............................................................................................................131
6.10.1 Configuring the data connection ......................................................................... 132
6.10.2 Configuring the FTP protocol.............................................................................. 136
6.10.3 Configuring the SFTP protocol ........................................................................... 140
6.10.4 Configuring the HTTP(S) protocol ...................................................................... 144
6.10.5 Configuring the (HTTP) browsing protocol ......................................................... 148
6.10.6 Configuring the POP3 protocol ........................................................................... 151
6.10.7 Configuring the SMTP protocol .......................................................................... 154
6.10.8 Configuring the IMAP protocol............................................................................ 159
6.10.9 Configuring the streaming protocol .................................................................... 162
6.10.10 Configuring the trace route protocol ............................................................... 165
6.10.11 Making data transfers...................................................................................... 167
6.11 Streaming video quality testing ..................................................................................168
6.11.1 NATA PEVQ-S license ....................................................................................... 168
6.11.2 PEVQ-S Properties dialog .................................................................................. 170
6.12 Application testing ......................................................................................................170
6.12.1 Screencasting and touchscreen simulation........................................................ 170
6.12.2 Facebook testing................................................................................................. 174
6.12.3 Twitter testing ...................................................................................................... 189
6.12.4 WhatsApp testing ................................................................................................ 192
6.12.5 BiP testing ........................................................................................................... 203
6.12.6 Viber testing ........................................................................................................ 209
6.12.7 Netflix testing....................................................................................................... 217
6.12.8 Dropbox testing ................................................................................................... 220
6.12.9 5GMark testing.................................................................................................... 223
6.13 SMS testing ................................................................................................................225
6.14 MMS testing................................................................................................................226
6.14.1 Packet session settings for MMS ....................................................................... 227
6.14.2 MMS Editor dialog............................................................................................... 228
6.14.3 Making MMS measurements .............................................................................. 229
6.15 USSD testing ..............................................................................................................229
6.16 Start external application............................................................................................230
6.17 TWAMP ......................................................................................................................232
6.18 ICMP Ping ..................................................................................................................233
6
6.19 Indoor mode ...............................................................................................................235

6.19.1 Automated location mapping .............................................................................. 235
6.19.2 Viewing indoor maps .......................................................................................... 240
6.19.3 Floorplans and BTS files..................................................................................... 243
6.19.4 Multiple routes and floorplans............................................................................. 245
6.19.5 Indoor route planning .......................................................................................... 245
6.19.6 iBwave maps ....................................................................................................... 247
6.19.7 DAS anomaly analysis ........................................................................................ 252
6.19.8 RF ingress analysis............................................................................................. 254
6.19.9 Indoor map popup menu..................................................................................... 255
6.20 Measurement and scanning profiles ..........................................................................261
6.20.1 Measurement profiles ......................................................................................... 262
6.20.2 Scanning profiles ................................................................................................ 264
6.21 IP packet monitoring...................................................................................................265
6.22 IP diagnostics .............................................................................................................267
6.23 Making script files .......................................................................................................268
6.23.1 Script transfer stop commands ........................................................................... 269
6.23.2 Receive call ......................................................................................................... 271
6.23.3 Wait settings........................................................................................................ 273
6.23.4 Advanced script settings ..................................................................................... 277
6.23.5 Running scripts ................................................................................................... 281
6.24 Call sequences ...........................................................................................................282
6.24.1 Running call sequences...................................................................................... 284
6.25 Measurement lists ......................................................................................................285
6.25.1 Measurement areas ............................................................................................ 290
6.26 Forcing functions ........................................................................................................293
6.26.1 Channel locking .................................................................................................. 293
6.26.2 Band locking........................................................................................................ 295
6.26.3 Network selection................................................................................................ 296
6.26.4 Carrier aggregation forcing ................................................................................. 298
6.26.5 Handover control................................................................................................. 299
6.26.6 Set terminal radio on/off (airplane mode) ........................................................... 304
6.26.7 Set WLAN radio on/off ........................................................................................ 304
6.26.8 AMR codec forcing.............................................................................................. 304
6.26.9 Qualcomm NV item read and write .................................................................... 304
6.26.10 eDRX and PSM setting configuration with LTE-M and NB-IoT devices ........ 306
6.27 Cell testing ..................................................................................................................307
6.28 RF validation...............................................................................................................309
6.28.1 RF test .................................................................................................................309
6.28.2 Scanner and UE level check .............................................................................. 312
6.28.3 Scanner configuration check .............................................................................. 313
7
6.29 Missing neighbor detection ........................................................................................313

6.29.1 Missing neighbor detection with a mobile .......................................................... 313
6.29.2 Missing neighbor detection with a scanner/scanner and mobile ....................... 315
6.30 Pilot pollution analysis ................................................................................................316
6.30.1 UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone ................................................ 317
6.30.2 UMTS pilot pollution analysis based on scanner measurements ...................... 319
6.30.3 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Mobile phones....................................... 319
6.30.4 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Scanners ............................................... 320
6.31 GSM interference analysis .........................................................................................320
6.32 Band scan...................................................................................................................323
6.33 Timeslot testing ..........................................................................................................325
6.34 Viewing graphs ...........................................................................................................327
6.34.1 Graph popup menu ............................................................................................. 328
6.34.2 Zoom - Scatter graph .......................................................................................... 332
6.34.3 Graph side panel – Layers.................................................................................. 333
6.34.4 Graph side panel – Values and parameter ........................................................ 341
6.34.5 Graph layer color configuration .......................................................................... 342
6.34.6 Gauge graphs ..................................................................................................... 348
6.34.7 Spectrum graphs................................................................................................. 349
6.34.8 Color grid graphs ................................................................................................ 351
6.34.9 How to read MIMO parameters in a bar graph................................................... 351
6.35 Viewing grids ..............................................................................................................352
6.35.1 Find function in signaling grid based on decoded message .............................. 354
6.35.2 Grid popup menu ................................................................................................ 355
6.36 Viewing maps .............................................................................................................369
6.36.1 Base stations on a map ...................................................................................... 371
6.36.2 MapXtreme maps................................................................................................ 375
6.36.3 Route plans ......................................................................................................... 377
6.36.4 Navigation Assistant ........................................................................................... 380
6.36.5 Map popup menu ................................................................................................ 387
6.36.6 Color Set Editor................................................................................................... 403
6.37 Export/import settings ................................................................................................405
6.37.1 Export settings to file .......................................................................................... 406
6.37.2 Export settings to FTP server ............................................................................. 406
6.37.3 Import settings from file ...................................................................................... 407
6.37.4 Import settings from FTP server ......................................................................... 407
6.37.5 Export/Import configuration files ......................................................................... 408
7 Ending Measurements ........................................................................................................................ 409
7.1 Measurement report ...................................................................................................410
8 Measurement Results ......................................................................................................................... 412
8.1 Analyzing measurement results .................................................................................412
8
8.2 Playing back measurement files ................................................................................412

8.2.1 Viewing and moving markers ............................................................................. 412
8.2.2 Closing playback files ......................................................................................... 413
8.3 Uploading measurement files to server .....................................................................414
8.3.1 Send Options - FTP ............................................................................................ 415
8.3.2 Send Options - HTTPS ....................................................................................... 416
8.3.3 Send Options - Nemo Xynergy ........................................................................... 417
8.3.4 Send Options - Dropbox ..................................................................................... 419
8.3.5 Send Options - Nemo Cloud............................................................................... 420
8.4 Exporting measurements ...........................................................................................422
8.5 Device Capability Reader...........................................................................................425
9 User Interface ......................................................................................................................................... 426
9.1 View groups ................................................................................................................427
9.2 Status bar ...................................................................................................................428
9.3 Parameters view.........................................................................................................428
9.4 Customizing the ribbon and quick access toolbar .....................................................429
9.5 Nemo Outdoor windows .............................................................................................430
9.5.1 Custom windows ................................................................................................. 430
9.5.2 Devices view ....................................................................................................... 431
9.5.3 Device Status view.............................................................................................. 433
9.5.4 Output window .................................................................................................... 434
9.5.5 Script Status window........................................................................................... 434
10 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................................... 435
10.1 Low throughput...........................................................................................................435
10.1.1 All Windows versions .......................................................................................... 436
10.2 Cannot add devices....................................................................................................438
10.3 Required license option missing ................................................................................438
10.4 Cannot make calls/packet transfers...........................................................................439
10.5 Measurement file checksum notification ....................................................................439
10.6 Number of USB devices exceeded ............................................................................439
11 Shortcut Keys ......................................................................................................................................... 440
12 Notification Icons ................................................................................................................................... 441
13 Appendix 1 - Making MapInfo® raster maps .............................................................................. 442
13.1 Registering a raster map with MapInfo® SW .............................................................442
14 Appendix 2 - CDMA settings and PRL editing in Nemo Outdoor ...................................... 444
15 Customer Support ................................................................................................................................. 449
15.1 Nemo Support Portal..................................................................................................449
15.2 Phone and email support ...........................................................................................449
15.3 Locations for Keysight Technologies .........................................................................449
9
1 Quick Guide
This quick guide will explain briefly how to set up the Nemo Outdoor measurement system and
how to start the actual measurements. Check the cross-references for more detailed
explanations on using Nemo Outdoor.
1.1 Setting up the system

Nemo Outdoor software license is tied to a HASP USB key and it is not possible to
install Nemo Outdoor without it.
Installing and running Nemo Outdoor requires administrator rights.
Do not upgrade, root, or reflash your measurement terminal firmware. Doing so will
cause the terminal to permanently lose its measurement capability!
1. Installing the software. Check the manual for hardware requirements if necessary
(see Hardware and software requirements). Run the Nemo Outdoor installation
program Nemo Outdoor.exe. The Nemo Outdoor SW and handlers are installed in
the same setup.
2. When the installation is finished, restart the computer.
3. The measurement mobiles, GPS receiver, and scanner are connected to the
computer’s USB ports.
4. If you are making data measurements, you need to configure the measurement
devices and install drivers. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide
provided in the Nemo Outdoor package.
5. On the Welcome page, the Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a
previously viewed measurement with the attached devices for playback. In the Open
a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations, and start
the devices in online mode, or decide to work offline first and connect and start them
later by clicking the Go offline button in Nemo Outdoor. In addition, the Automatic
device detection functionality in the Create New Device Configuration tool
automatically detects devices connected to the computer and assigns the appropriate,
previously created COM ports to them.
6. To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click the Other.. button in the Open
a Device Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor dialog (see
Configuration through Load Device Configuration dialog).
7. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a
premade device configuration and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the
device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. If
you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without
connecting and starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device
configuration and click the Work Offline button. You can change the measurement
configurations in the offline mode and activate the device later. When you want to
activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement system and click the
Go Online button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.
10
8. If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load
Device Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open
Measurement File, and select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a
saved device configuration in File | Open Hardware Configuration and start a
measurement in online or offline mode. Alternatively, you can go to Measurement |
Add New Device, select a device and configure it for measurements. You can also
do this from the Configuration Manager (Ctrl+M) (see step 9). In addition, you can
also use the Autodetect functionality by clicking the Autodetect button in the main
view, which automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned COM
ports.
9. To add measurement devices manually, click the Add button in the main view. Select
the device type (phone, scanner, GPS) that you want to add and select the device
model from the list. Click Next. In the Device Configuration dialog, select the correct
COM ports and click OK.
10. If you are using a GPS receiver, you will also need a map. Copy all the required map
files to the maps folder, for example, C:\Nemo Tools\Maps. To define the default map
file and map folder, select Settings | User Interface Properties | Paths. In the Maps
field, select the folder where map files are stored. In the Default map field, browse the
default map file (see User Interface Properties – Paths).
11. If you have base station files (.nbf or .csv), copy them to the BTS files folder, for
example, C:\Nemo Tools\BTS files.
1.2 Using Nemo Outdoor

When a green light is blinking in the Device Status window, the device is connected properly
and is ready for measurements.
1. First, open some measurement windows through the Data Windows tab for
monitoring the measurement. Alternatively, you can open a workspace (File | Open
Workspace) that contains some predefined views (graphs, grids, maps, etc.).
2. You can use Scripts (see Configuration Manager - Scripts) to generate a sequence of
actions that Nemo Outdoor will execute automatically. Click the
Device script settings button in the Devices view. Select an existing script in the
Script File field or create a new one by clicking the Script Editor button.
3. If you want to be notified about certain events during the measurement, use the
Notifications function. Click the Device notification settings button
in the Devices view to access the Notifications dialog.
4. Run a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button . Nemo Outdoor will start the
recording automatically. To stop running the script, click the button again. To finish
both the recording and the script, click the Stop button.
5. To perform measurements manually, select the appropriate actions, such as, start
voice call or send MMS message, from the Measurement control menu.
6. Stop the recording by clicking the Stop button. Nemo Outdoor has recorded a
measurement file of the performed test calls/scan on the computer’s hard disk. You
can playback the measurement file by clicking the Playback button in the Report
dialog. Click Rename to change the file name.
11
1.2.1 Using Nemo Outdoor with command line options

Outdoor supports the following command line options. These command lines will enable the
user to enter a certain profile in Nemo Outdoor. You can enter the command lines either with
Command Prompt through Start | Run | cmd, or you can create a shortcut to Nemo Outdoor
on the desktop and enter the command line to the shortcut’s Properties | Shortcut |Target
field.
• /W <workspace> will directly open the specified workspace in Nemo Outdoor
• /H <hw config> will directly open the given device configuration in Nemo Outdoor
• /M SIMPLE will open Nemo Outdoor in limited mode, in which the user is not able to
save any changes made to the device configuration or workspace
• /DEBUGBIN will start debug logging
For example, the command line below will start Nemo Outdoor, load the test.worx workspace,
N95.hwcx device configuration, and prevent any changes possibly made to them from taking
effect.
• Outdoor /W test.worx /H N95.hwcx /M SIMPLE
12
2 Before You Begin

This user guide explains how to set up and operate the Nemo Outdoor Air Interface
Measurement Tool Software developed by Keysight Technologies, Inc.
Nemo Outdoor is a portable engineering tool for measuring and monitoring the air interface of
digital networks.
Nemo Outdoor is an effective tool for tracing digital networks. Nemo Outdoor collects
measurement results and geographical coordinates (when used with a GPS receiver) and
stores them on a hard disk. Measurement results provide useful information for network
optimization, verification, and maintenance purposes. Results can be efficiently and easily
viewed with the Nemo analysis tool Nemo Analyze.
Nemo Outdoor uses licensed technology from various manufacturers. For a complete list of
supported devices, see the Nemo Outdoor technical overview and data sheets.
2.1 Licensing
Nemo Outdoor software license is tied to a HASP USB key and it is not possible to install
Nemo Outdoor without it. Software-based licenses are not available.
A new license type and dongle HW was introduced with Nemo Outdoor 7.5.0. All fielded
dongle keys and licenses must be migrated to a new dongle when used with Nemo Outdoor
version 7.5.0 or higher. Please contact Keysight Technologies Finland,
nemo.support@keysight.com if you still have an old dongle.
2.1.1 Technical support expiration

The USB dongle keys used with Nemo Outdoor include a compulsory technical support and
maintenance agreement option. The technical support expiration date defines the date the
agreement ends. After this date it is not possible to start the new version of the Nemo Outdoor
application. Example: A customer has purchased Nemo Outdoor version 7.50 with a 1-year
technical support maintenance agreement in April 2015. The customer is entitled for free
updates until April 2016. Nemo Outdoor versions released after April 2016 cannot be used with
the USB key without renewing the technical support & maintenance agreement. After the
technical support & maintenance agreement is renewed, the key can be updated remotely and
the customer can update the application to the latest version.
2.2 Important
Installing and running Nemo Outdoor requires administrator rights.
Do not upgrade, root, or reflash your measurement terminal firmware. Doing so will
cause the terminal to permanently lose its measurement capability!
The test devices (smartphones etc.) tested and sold by Keysight Nemo Wireless Network
Solutions are intended for testing purposes only. Software changes in devices may limit their
normal use. Keysight Nemo Wireless Network Solutions does its best to provide test devices
without any limitations but it is not always possible. Keysight Nemo Wireless Network
Solutions assumes no liability if any commercial application or feature is blocked or limited due
to software or other device-related modifications.
13
If the test device is moved to another country or used in the network of another operator than
initially ordered, it is possible that the device does not support all network features. Keysight
Nemo Wireless Network Solutions assumes no liability in any cases.
The Nemo Outdoor user must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the
signaling behind wireless technologies.
The Qualcomm handlers enables the use of Qualcomm CDMA2000, MSM6500, MSM6800,
TM6200, TM6250, TM6275, TM6275US, TM7200, and TM8200 chipset-based terminals that
have not been verified by Keysight. These terminals can be used with Nemo Outdoor but
Keysight does not guarantee that the terminals will work flawlessly. Please check the Nemo
Outdoor product description for a list of measurement terminals verified and approved by
Keysight.
Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test mobile’s keypad to make or answer calls when the Nemo
Outdoor system is running.
With Samsung terminals the key tone volume should be turned off. Otherwise, the mobile can
dial a wrong number.
With Nokia GSM, GPRS, and EDGE terminals the test display (Net Monitor) must not be
activated.
In voice quality measurements the volume of the mobile headset must be adjusted to correct
levels.
Do not place stickers containing metal on the mobile because it may lower the transmission
power of the mobile.
After the measurements have been completed and it is desired to take the Nemo Outdoor test
mobile into normal use, it must be powered off and on again to deselect/deactivate the Nemo
Outdoor triggered events in the mobile.
Use only the supplied connecting cable, included with the Nemo Outdoor, for connecting the
Nemo Outdoor test devices to the computer’s USB port.
When using the Nemo Outdoor test mobile for measurement use, the battery operation time is
reduced from normal use. The best operation times will be achieved when the batteries are
regularly charged and discharged as instructed in the mobile user manual.
2.2.1 Local laws and regulations

Note that the local laws and/or regulations may set limitations, restrictions or other obligations
on the use of the Nemo Outdoor and/or the test devices. Observe the laws and regulations of
the country (as well as of any other relevant jurisdiction) where the Nemo Outdoor and/or test
device is used. Keysight assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply
with the local laws and/or regulations.
2.2.2 Nemo Outdoor laptop settings

The laptops used for running Nemo Outdoor need to be set up before measurements. Below
are described the most important settings that may have an effect on the measurement
results.
2.2.2.1 Power options
Before you begin using Nemo Outdoor, you need to set the power management options of the
laptop to High performance to avoid disruptions in the performance of Nemo Outdoor. Go to
Control Panel | Hardware and Sound | Power Options. Select the High performance
power plan.
14
2.2.2.2 Active protection system

If there is a system that detects acceleration in the laptop and causes the hard disk to stop
when jolted, it should be turned off. Otherwise, there may be breaks in measurement data. In
voice quality testing there may be missing MOS scores, and with other test devices, gaps in
the measurement data.
With Lenovo laptops, select Control Panel | System and Security | Lenovo Active Protection.
On the Configuration page, deselect the Enable Active Protection System option.
2.2.2.3 USB hub properties

Also, check the generic USB hub properties. Go to Device Manager, expand the Universal
Serial Bus controllers item, right-click the Generic USB Hub item and select Properties.
Open the Power Management tab and check that the Allow the computer to turn off this
device to save power option is deselected. Repeat this for all the Generic USB Hub items.
15
2.2.3 Traffic safety

Do not operate Nemo Outdoor and drive (or walk) at the same time. Remember, traffic safety
comes first.
Note that in some countries it is illegal to drive a car and operate a computer at the same time.
Please observe the legislation of the country where the measurements are performed.
Keysight assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with local
legislation.
Always observe the local speed limits and traffic regulations when conducting drive testing.
2.2.4 Operating environment

Do not operate Nemo Outdoor without reading the User Manual, including its warnings, for the
devices used by Nemo Outdoor.
Always stop using Nemo Outdoor and switch off the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) when it is
forbidden to use radio equipment or when it may cause interference or danger.
Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) in a hospital. It may interfere with nearby
electronic devices.
Never use Nemo Outdoor in an aircraft. The use of mobiles in an aircraft may be dangerous.
Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in gas stations, fuel depots, chemical
plants, or sites where blasting operations are in progress.
16
3 Nemo Outdoor System Overview
3.1 Voice testing

The voice testing environment consists of Nemo Outdoor compatible mobiles and a PC (user
provided or, optionally, provided by Keysight with all the software installed). The package also
includes the necessary connecting cables, serial or USB port adapters, a GPS receiver, and
fast frequency scanners if applicable. Also the Nemo Voice Quality option is available.
3.2 Circuit-switched data testing

The circuit-switched (CS) data testing environment consists of three parts: a measurement unit
(Nemo Outdoor), an application server, and a data server. The data server is used to establish
a data connection between the measurement unit and the application server. Nemo Data Test
Server can be used as the application server. It is a Linux-based administration-free server
having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous TCP/IP
connections from test terminals. CS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that
support circuit-switched data.
The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the
measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice
versa. If you are using a FTP server, the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or
downloads (Receive mode) test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP
server, the measurement unit can only receive files.
The user can define the number of timeslots and the coding schemes, which in turn define the
desired transfer rate. During the measurement, the user will be able to monitor data
throughputs and error rates on different network layers, as well as certain parameters, such as
coding scheme and number of timeslots.
3.3 Packet-switched data testing

The packet-switched (PS) data testing environments consist of two ends: the measurement
unit and an application server. Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server.
It is a Linux-based administration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can
serve multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals. PS data testing is
possible on all cellular technologies that support packet-switched data.
The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the
measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice
versa. If you are using an FTP server, the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or
downloads (Receive mode) test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP
server, the measurement unit can only receive files.
During the measurement, the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on
different network layers, as well as certain parameters such as coding scheme and number of
timeslots.
17
3.4 Nemo Active Testing Application (NATA)

Nemo Active Testing Application (NATA) is Keysight’s proprietary communications interface
and application developed for Android-based smartphones. With the NATA interface,
smartphones communicate with PC-based applications, such as, Nemo Outdoor, enabling
voice quality (PESQ/POLQA) measurements and data transfers on smartphones without any
additional hardware.
When performing voice quality measurements with NATA, the smartphone records the
received sample audio files and transfers audio files via the NATA interface to the test
computer in real time. The computer calculates the PESQ/POLQA MOS scores and the values
are written in the Nemo Outdoor log file. Eight phones can be connected to one CPU
simultaneously.
Also data transfers can be made using NATA installed on the smartphone. Please check the
Nemo Active Testing Application (NATA) data sheet for a list of supported devices and
features.
NATA versions 1.0 and 1.1 are not supported with Nemo Outdoor version 7.3.0.x and
later. Customers using Nemo Active Testing Application 1.0 or 1.1 should not update
Nemo Outdoor to the latest version before updating the NATA application on the test
handsets. Nemo Active Testing Application application and update instructions are
available from KSM.
NATA Voice Quality Testing Option can be fetched from NATA license server
automatically for all the currently fielded units by launching the Nemo Active Testing
Application 2.00 application on the phone after installation.
3.4.1 Installing NATA

This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring Nemo Active Testing
Application (NATA). Handsets ordered with Nemo Active Testing Application come preinstalled
from Keysight. If you wish to use your existing Nemo Outdoor test terminals, please install the
Nemo Active Testing Application first. Please check the Nemo Active Testing Application data
sheet for a list of supported devices.
Requirements:
• Nemo Handy firmware
1. First install the Nemo Active Testing Application on the mobile (if not preinstalled by
Keysight). Connect the device to your laptop with a USB cable. Copy the .apk file on
your device in the Nemo folder.
2. Select Apps | My files on your device and browse to the Nemo folder. Tap the .apk
file.
3. Select Install. When the installation is finished, select Open.
4. After the Nemo Active Testing Application has started, restart the device.
5. When the device has restarted, connect the device with Nemo Outdoor.
6. When the device is connected with Nemo Outdoor, the Nemo Active Testing
Application is started automatically. If the Nemo Active Testing Application does not
appear, start the application manually, reboot the device, and try again adding the
device to Nemo Outdoor.
18
7. Select a USB configuration setting at the bottom of the view. The selection depends
on the device.
19
8. In the Device Configuration – Port settings page, select Automatic in the Nemo
Active Testing Application (NATA) field and define the correct Trace and Modem
ports. Click OK. The device is now ready.
3.4.2 Updating the NATA SW and license

After installation, existing Nemo Active Testing Application users can fetch software updates
and a license over-the-air from the NATA license server by launching the NATA application on
the phone.
In the License Browser view, select the correct license.
Confirm by selecting Load.
After the license has been loaded, the device needs to be restarted. Once the device restarts,
you can connect the device to Nemo Outdoor. Nemo Active Testing Application will start
automatically.
20
To check for software updates, make sure that WiFi or mobile data (with Nemo Invex II HIM
devices) is enabled, press the button at the bottom of the NATA main view and select
Check for Updates.
3.4.3 Low data throughput with NATA

New Android-based smartphones with Android version 6.0 have battery optimization enabled
by default. It will stop some CPU and network activity operating in the background for Android
apps, thus saving battery. It is activated when the handset is left idle for a period of time, while
unplugged and with the screen off. Battery saving mode interrupts background activity for
Android applications such as Nemo Active Testing Application. With data transfers this is seen
with limited data throughput values. Battery saving option is disabled by default for the
handsets delivered by Keysight. However, if low data throughput occurs the following settings
should be checked and battery optimization should be disabled for all applications. Please
note that settings menu varies depending on handset vendor and model. Step by step
instructions per handset can be found from the Device Configuration Guide.
1. Select phone's Settings.
2. Select battery from the device list and select Battery optimization from the menu icon at
the top-right of the screen.
3. Select all apps from the drop-down menu in the center of the display. You will see all the
apps that are Doze-enabled
4. Select Don’t optimize for all apps and then press Done.
21
3.4.4 TeamViewer QuickSupport for NATA

When handset isolation modules are used in Nemo Invex II, changing settings and updating
the NATA software can be done remotely with TeamViewer QuickSupport without opening the
housing. With TeamViewer it is possible to make a remote connection to the test handset via
the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Please note that one active connection at a time is
supported, i.e. connections to several handsets simultaneously are not possible. The laptop
running Nemo Outdoor must be connected to the internet, for example, by using a dedicated
handset or a USB modem connected to the controlling laptop. The test handset must be in
service and support data services. Packet data must be enabled.
The TeamViewer Quick Support (QS) application and TeamViewer Remote Control add-on
module are preinstalled to all test handsets delivered by Keysight with the Nemo Invex
handset isolation modules. TeamViewer must be installed also to the PC running Nemo
Outdoor.
TeamViewer can be used free of charge only with non-commercial use. Customers
using the UI monitoring and controlling with the TeamViewer tools for commercial use
must obtain the licenses directly from TeamViewer (www.teamviewer.com).
To control the NATA device from Nemo Outdoor, right-click the device in the Devices view and
select Open Remote Connection.
22
Nemo Outdoor will connect to the device and open the TeamViewer window with a view of the
device screen. You can now control the device.
3.4.5 Local NATA software updates

Local NATA application update provides convenient and easy way to update all NATA test
handsets at once via Nemo Outdoor user interface. Users can choose one or all NATA devices
and perform the update process. Users can browse to the NATA installation package from the
Nemo Outdoor user interface after which the files are transferred to the device and
automatically installed. The update package will also include applications supported by Nemo
Outdoor, such as WhatsApp and TeamViewer.
Update process is possible only when devices are connected (in online mode) and
recording is not active.
Nemo Active Testing Application installation package is available from the USB memory stick
provided at the time of delivery. License updates can be also done via Nemo Outdoor user
interface. Please note that NATA local software and license update is supported from NATA
7.9.0 version onwards. Updating from older version than 7.9.0 must be done using NATA
application on the test handset, e.g. using screen casting or TeamViewer.
23
You can update NATA software and license by right-clicking the device in the Devices view
and selecting Update NATA in the drop down menu.
Note that to use this functionality the NATA version must be compatible with Nemo
Outdoor version, otherwise the update will not go through. Once NATA has been
updated manually by copying the .apk file to your device’s Nemo file and installing the
software, updates can be done through Nemo Outdoor.
3.4.6 NATA IMS video call quality option license

Separate license option and license file exists for NATA-based (VQMon) NATA IMS Video Call
Quality Option per test handset. License is always located in the test handset and it is not
transferable between test devices.
License file generated per device ID is in the memory card. File name is: host_id.txt and it is
located at: sdcard/Nemo/<product> where <product> is Handy, Walker Air or NATA.
Host_id.txt file need to be sent to Keysight customer support. License file in return with name:
vqmon_license.txt must be stored at: sdcard/Nemo/<product> where <product> is Handy,
Walker Air or NATA.
24
3.5 Nemo Carrying Case

The 4th generation Nemo Carrying Case is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking
solution for use with Nemo Outdoor. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on
various system technologies and networks with support for up to eight test mobiles/data cards,
a scanner and a sound card. In addition, the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-
option allows the use of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls,
voice quality calls and data transfers simultaneously. The system is connected to a single
laptop, saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of
the system.
25
3.6 Nemo Network Benchmarking Solution
Nemo Network Benchmarking Solution (NBM) is an innovative, modular, fully scalable, and
distributed drive test benchmarking solution that enables mobile operators, regulators and
service contractors measure wireless networks reliably and cost-effectively.
Thanks to the unique system architecture, the measurement load is distributed across the test
equipment, and all devices are run by Nemo Outdoor providing a powerful but easy-to-use
benchmarking system. One measurement setup can be extended to include up to 48
simultaneous test devices and two scanners. All tests are run by Nemo Active Testing
Application on the test devices reflecting real end-user quality of experience. MOS scores are
calculated with the very latest, 5G-compatible POLQA 3 algorithm.
26
3.7 Indoor measurements

Nemo Outdoor has an indoor mode measurement option in which case Nemo Outdoor can be
installed on a Tablet PC. Alternatively, a regular laptop can be used as well. As GPS receivers
cannot be used indoors, the indoor option offers a marker function to store location data. Just
click markers along the measurement route and the route will be drawn on the map. It is also
possible to use BTS files with floorplans. With Nemo Backpack Pro, test equipment can be
easily taken inside buildings.
27
4 Installing Nemo Outdoor System

This section provides the basic instructions for installing Nemo Outdoor software and devices.
Make sure you have all the listed equipment before starting the software installation.
Note that installation must be run under Administrator account or other user account
with administrative privileges. Note that if the existing Nemo Outdoor version is 6.2.1.x
or older it must be uninstalled via add or remove programs before the Nemo Outdoor
7.x installation can be run. During Sentinel HASP driver installation, you are prompted
to restart the computer. Press “Restart later” to continue with the Nemo Outdoor
installation.
4.1 Hardware and software requirements

• PC (Lenovo or Dell recommended) with Windows 7 ® Professional (32/64 bit),
Windows® 8, and Windows® 10
• Processor Intel® Core™ i7 2.66GHz or higher
• SSD drive recommended
• 500 MB of free hard disk space for installation and use; 4 GB recommended
• One USB port for copy protection module
• One USB 3.0 port for test device
• Ethernet port RJ45
• Display resolution 1400 x 900 recommended
• Memory 4GB RAM minimum, 8GB recommended
• PDF reader for opening the user manual
• Depending on the scanner used, one USB port or serial port or RJ45 or FireWire port
per scanner
• One USB port for an external GPS receiver
• Internal 3G/ 4G modem recommended in case end to end call communication with
Nemo Server and Nemo Cloud is used
4.2 Other hardware requirements

The following hardware is also supported for using Nemo Outdoor. Please note that the
scanning receivers and many of the GPS receivers require also +12 V DC power supply (e.g.,
from cigarette lighter plug).
• External power supply recommended for computer if vehicle mounted
• GPS receiver: (optional, following types are supported)
o Garmin GPS II
o Garmin GPS II Plus
o Garmin GPS III/III+
o Garmin GPS 35
o Garmin V
o Garmin 18 USB
o Garmin 18x USB
o Rohde Schwarz TSMX-PPS2 DR
o Transsystem GM-3
o Trimble Placer 450/455 (TAIP) and GPS antenna unit
o U-blox
o Most other GPS receivers with NMEA 0183 compatible output
Nemo Outdoor software is protected with a HASP USB key (see Licensing).
28
4.3 Nemo Outdoor software installation

To install or upgrade Nemo Outdoor:
If you have a previous version of Nemo Outdoor installed, please remove it before
installation. Go to Control Panel and select Programs | Uninstall a program. Right-click
on Nemo Outdoor and select Uninstall.
Note that installation must be run under Administrator account or other user account
with administrative privileges.
1. Select Start | Run in the Windows Status bar. Type D:\Nemo Outdoor\Nemo Outdoor
x.xx.xx in the Open field (xx refers to the version number) and click the OK button.
When the Installation program starts, follow the instructions on your screen. We
recommend that you select the Complete setup type.
2. If you want to install the Device Capability Reader, select the Device Capability
Reader option in the setup dialog.
3. When the Nemo Outdoor software installation is complete, you will need to restart the
computer.
29
To uninstall Nemo Outdoor:

1. Go to Control Panel and select Programs | Uninstall a program. Right-click on
Nemo Outdoor and select Uninstall.
Note that uninstallation must be run under Administrator account or other user
account with administrative privileges.
4.4 Over-the-air SW updates

Over-the-air (OTA) updates provide a convenient way to keep your Nemo Outdoor units up to
date and to manage the update process.
Click the Updates button in the Settings tab and select Check for Updates to check if there
are any software updates available for Nemo Outdoor, NATA, NIDI/NDI, and Nemo Invex II. If
there are updates available, the setup files are downloaded on the Nemo Outdoor laptop, after
which you run the installation locally. The system first checks for Nemo Outdoor updates, and
then for NATA and NIDI/NDI updates, and last for Nemo Invex II updates (if you are running
the SW with a Nemo Invex license). The system checks for NATA, NIDI/NDI, and Nemo Invex
updates that are compatible with the Nemo Outdoor version.
Valid technical support and maintenance agreement is required. If technical

support and maintenance agreement has expired, the Updates button is not
active.
4.5 Nemo Outdoor device set-up

Below you will find instructions for connecting devices to the Nemo Outdoor measurement
system. However, instructions for devices that require a data connection can be found in the
Device Configuration Guide.
30
You can reset and reboot devices manually from Nemo Outdoor. Click the Measurement
Settings button in the Devices view and select Reset or Reboot.
4.5.1 Connecting a GPS receiver

1. Plug the GPS USB cable into a USB port on your computer.
2. Windows will automatically detect the new device and install the necessary drivers.
3. Start Nemo Outdoor. Select Add | GPS.
4. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next.
5. Select the USB port to which your GPS receiver is connected. The program
automatically sets the other parameters to match your navigator selection.
6. Click OK. Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements.
4.5.2 Connecting a scanner

See the Nemo Scanner Guide for information on how to connect and start scanners with Nemo
Outdoor.
31
4.5.3 Connecting voice quality devices

4.5.3.1 Voice quality measurements with Nemo Active Testing Application
This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring the voice quality system
using Nemo Active Testing Application. Handsets ordered with Nemo Active Testing
Application come preinstalled from Keysight. If you wish to use your existing Nemo Outdoor
test terminals, please install the Nemo Active Testing Application first.
Nemo Handy firmware is required on the test phone.
1. Install the Nemo Active Testing Application on the mobile (if not preinstalled by
Keysight). Connect the device to your laptop with a USB cable. Copy the.apk file on
your device in the Nemo folder.
2. Select Apps | My files on your device and browse to the Nemo folder. Tap the.apk
file.
3. Select Install. When the installation is finished, select Open.
4. After the Nemo Active Testing Application has started, restart the device.
5. When the device has restarted, connect the device with Nemo Outdoor as instructed
in the Device Configuration Guide included in the Nemo Outdoor product package.
6. When the device is connected with Nemo Outdoor, the Nemo Active Testing
Application is started automatically. If the Nemo Active Testing Application does not
appear, start the application manually, reboot the device, and try again adding the
device to Nemo Outdoor.
32
7. The Outdoor option should be selected as the USB configuration. The Mass memory
and Mass memory ADB options are not needed with Nemo Outdoor.
8. In the Nemo Outdoor Device Configuration – Voice/video quality page, select the
Nemo Active Testing Application option and define which voice quality algorithm
you wish you use. Click OK. The device is now ready.
33
4.5.3.2 Voice quality measurements with Nemo Intelligent Device Interface (NIDI) and Nemo Device Interface
(NDI)
This chapter describes the steps for setting up and configuring the voice quality system using
NIDI and NDI.
1. Refer to the NIDI/NDI user guide for setting up the NIDI/NDI hardware (connecting
cables, etc.).
2. Install the FTDI COM port drivers and device-specific drivers as instructed in the
Device Configuration Guide.
3. After connecting the device with Nemo Outdoor, go to the Device Configuration –
Voice/video quality dialog and select Nemo Intelligent Device Interface (NIDI)/
Nemo Device Interface (NDI) as the voice quality device. Click OK. The device is
now ready.
34
4.6 Nemo Invex device set-up

After the Nemo Invex chassis has been set up and configured, you can connect the
measurement servers (UIC modules in the Nemo Invex chassis) and devices to Nemo
Outdoor. Start Nemo Outdoor with the Nemo Invex license option. Clicking Group Devices
by button , and selecting Group by Measurement Server displays a list of available
measurement servers and UICs. Click Refresh to find all measurement servers connected to
the system.
To connect to a measurement server, select the server and click Connect. The State will
change to Connected. Repeat this for each measurement server that you want to connect with
Nemo Outdoor. Finally, click Close.
The Devices view will display all connected measurement servers. The Local item refers to
devices connected directly to the Nemo Outdoor laptop. Click Autodetect to detect devices
connected to the measurement servers.
35
A list of devices connected to each measurement server is displayed. Define whether the
device will be used for voice quality or data measurements. Read chapter Multiple data
connections on one measurement server for more information on having two active data
connections on a single measurement server.
If you are adding a scanner, click the scanner name and select the frequency configuration
supported by the scanner.
36
Finally click Online. The Start Devices dialog opens. Here you can review the UIC and device
information. If you are happy with the configuration, click Online or Offline to add the devices
to Nemo Outdoor.
37
You can also control individual UICs from Nemo Outdoor. Right-click on the UIC and select the
command from the context menu.
With the Enable Automatic Device Recovery option, you can enable and disable the
USB/hardware reset capability. The option enables/disables automatic USB reset by the
device connected to the USB port. When disabled, all UIC USB leds in the Nemo Invex Status
view turn yellow.
It is possible to save the device configuration by selecting File | Save Device Configuration
As. This way all the devices can be loaded automatically the next time you start Nemo
Outdoor.
To disconnect measurement servers, click the Measurement servers button, select a
measurement server and click Disconnect.
4.6.1 Nemo Invex Status view

The Nemo Invex Status view displays information about the current Nemo Invex hardware
configuration. The image shows the actual configuration and relevant health information for the
selected module. If there are more than one chassis, the chassis are numbered and you can
arrange the view by dragging and dropping the chassis. The Nemo Invex Status view also
displays all possible hardware alerts and warnings, such as high/low voltage, high/low
temperature and battery shutdown. Warnings are highlighted in yellow and alerts in red. The
warning and alert threshold levels are user-configurable and you can also define an audio
alert. Right-click the Nemo Invex Status view and select Set Chassis Alert Thresholds.
38
The Nemo Invex Status view will be updated accordingly. In the example below, the chassis
number 1 is displaying a warning about high temperature.
39
The UIC and HIM module connections are color-coded. If you select a HIM module from the
image, the USB port where the HIM module is connected to will be highlighted with the same
color.
You can also reset individual USB ports by right-clicking the USB port in the image and
selecting the command from the context menu.
From the Nemo Invex Status view context menu you can Enable Debug Logging for
individual UICs. First run Nemo Outdoor in debug mode and then connect to the UIC to
activate the command.
40
Select Export HW Information to a Text File to save the Nemo Invex II hardware information
containing all chassis and module versions and HW health information in a text file. Note that
the UICs need to be connected in order to export the information.
The Nemo Invex Systems view displays detailed information about the UICs and the devices.
You can disconnect UICs and refresh the view. For HIM modules, the device information is
shown.
41
4.6.2 Multiple data connections on one measurement server

You can have multiple active data connections on a single measurement server. For example,
MMS can be tested with one test device while another device is performing an FTP transfer.
The data routing option is enabled by default with Nemo Invex allowing more than one active
data connection. However, when routing table modifications is enabled, there are some
limitations with data testing. For example, it is required that different source IP addresses for
data testing are used. This means that the host IP address or URL must be different for
each test device.
Routing table modification should be disabled when only one active data connection is
required. Select Settings | User Interface Properties | Measurement and set Routing table
modifications for devices setting to Do not modify.
If routing table modification is disabled when performing multi-data testing with one
measurement server, problems may be caused when several data connections are opened
from one host computer to the terminals. All data connections to be established travel along
one connection between the host computer and the terminal, i.e. all data connections are
routed via one terminal, not via different terminals and their interfaces. This will distort the test
results.
4.7 General guidelines for drive testing

Check the condition of all antennas, cables, and connectors: there should be no tight curves,
no slashes or cuts.
Check that connectors are properly connected. Loose connections cause unstable
measurements or wrong attenuation of field strength.
Place antennas properly on the roof of the vehicle. Antennas should be installed as
symmetrically as possible and at least one wavelength from the corners and roof windows, and
two wavelengths from each other. If antennas are too close to each other, it may cause
interference.
42
λ=c/f
c = 300E6 (m/s)
f = frequency (Hz)
450 MHz, λ = 66 cm
900 MHz, λ = 33 cm
1800 MHz, λ = 17 cm
1900 MHz, λ = 16 cm
GPS antenna 1565-1575MHz, λ =
19 cm
Check the configuration before starting the measurement.

Band λ
450 66 cm (26”)
700 42 cm (18”)
850 35 cm (14”)
900 33 cm (13”)
1800 17 cm (7”)
1900 16 cm (6.3”)
2100 14 cm (5.5”)
2300 13 cm (5.1”)
2500 12 cm (4.7”)
2600 11 cm (4.3”)
GPS (1565- 1575) 19 cm (7.5”)
When removing antennas after a drive test, DO NOT pull antennas from the antenna
cables. Hold the antenna from the base and tilt the antenna away from the cable.
Check the condition of all RF cables, and connectors: no tight curves, no slashes or
cuts.
Check that RF connectors are properly connected. Loose connections cause unstable
measurements or wrong attenuation of signals. Use the SMA torque wrench to tighten
the connectors.
Minimum distance between antennas, at least one wavelength from the corners and
roof windows, and two wavelengths from each other.
Individual antennas may have different performance. Therefore use only one antenna
type with all test devices.
RF-splitters shall be used only for test UEs. If RF-splitters are used also with
scanners, separate RF-splitters must be used.
Main and MIMO RF cables of the same UE shall not be connected to the same RF-
splitter as it would disable the MIMO/diversity.
43
5 Configuration Settings
After you have installed Nemo Outdoor, you will need to configure the system for your
environment before you will be able to use the measurement functions. The following
instructions will help you in this initial configuration.
5.1 Configuring Nemo Outdoor

You have three different ways to start using Nemo Outdoor. For a first-time user the most
convenient way is to start with the Welcome page and proceed from there. Older users of
Nemo Outdoor may want to use the Load Device Configuration dialog, and more advanced
users may want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually.
5.1.1 Configuration through Welcome page

1. The Nemo Outdoor Welcome page offers an easy way to configure the system for a
first-time user, and also helps more advanced users to add new devices. It appears
on the screen when you start Nemo Outdoor. If you do not want to view this window in
the future when opening Nemo Outdoor, select the Do not show this again option.
2. With the Autodetect functionality, you can automatically add devices to Nemo
Outdoor without needing to manually set up the system. This functionality
automatically searches the Device Manager for the assigned modem and trace COM
port information.
Please note that the automatic detection is only available for devices connected with a
USB cable. Furthermore, you may need to select the correct device model from the
drop-down menu.
44
Note that this functionality varies depending on the device vendor. In addition, you
may need to configure the device before connecting it to Nemo Outdoor. Please refer
to the Nemo Outdoor Device Configuration Guide for instructions on how to do this.
The device may also require additional configurations in its modem settings.
3. You can start the devices in online mode by clicking Start Devices, start them in
offline mode by clicking Go Offline, or refresh the device configuration by clicking
Refresh on the bottom right-hand corner of the window. This is useful, e.g., when you
accidentally unplug a device and plug it in again.
4. PIN code requests should be turned off for all devices but in case there is a pending
PIN code request for a test device, a dialog will be displayed where you can enter the
PIN code. After pressing OK, PIN code requesting will be disabled from the device.
45
5. You can also open a workspace file from the Welcome dialog.
6. With the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device
configurations. This includes the trace and modem COM ports assigned to the device.
If you would like to start Nemo Outdoor in online mode, select a pre-made device
configuration and a workspace and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the
device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements.
46
7. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without
configuration and click the Go Offline button. If you want, you can configure the
devices manually and activate them. When you want to activate the devices, connect
the devices to the measurement system and click the Go Online button in the Nemo
Outdoor toolbar.
8. The Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed
measurement with the attached devices for playback. In the Workspace field you can
select a workspace for the measurement. Click Load Selected Files.
5.1.2 Configuration through Load Device Configuration dialog

To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click Other… in the Open a Device
Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window.
1. If you have used Nemo Outdoor previously and saved a device configuration and a
workspace, Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load a device configuration and
a workspace. If you are a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor, go to step 4.
2. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a
pre-made device configuration and a workspace and click Online. All the devices
included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start
measurements.
47
3. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without
configuration and click the Offline button in the Load Device Configuration dialog.
You can change the measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the
device. When you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to the
measurement system and click the Go Online button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.
4. In the Load Device Configuration dialog, select Empty Device Configuration and
click Start Devices. An empty Nemo Outdoor main window appears.
5. Add a device by clicking the Add button in the Devices view. Choose the
appropriate phone, scanner, or GPS receiver from the list and click Next.
6. All Qualcomm terminals are unified into one Qualcomm handler. Nemo Outdoor
application detects the chipset of the test device and activates traces accordingly.
7. A properties dialog will be opened for the selected device. Set the appropriate values.
8. Click on Measurement Properties in the Device Configuration dialog to enter the
Measurement Properties dialog. Here you will find device-specific measurement
settings. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK.
9. Double-click the User Interface item in the Configuration Manager (Alt+M) to open the
User Interface Properties dialog. Here you will find general measurement settings that
affect all devices. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK. You can now start the
measurements.
48
5.1.3 Configuring Nemo Outdoor manually

If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load Device
Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open Measurement,
and select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a saved device configuration
in File | Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online or offline mode.
Alternatively, you can go to Measurement | Add New Device, select a device and configure it
for measurements.
In addition, you can use the Autodetect devices functionality which automatically detects a
previously added device and its assigned COM ports. Click the Autodetect Devices button in
the toolbar.
A dialog with a list of previously added devices appears. First, select the device chipset if it
was not detected automatically. In the Label field you can type a name for the device. Select
the devices you want to add, define whether the data or voice quality modes are enabled, and
click the Online or Offline button at the bottom of the dialog.
5.1.4 Use case 1. Start measurements automatically upon device startup

The following example case exemplifies the process of setting up Nemo Outdoor to start
recording automatically when devices are connected and started.
In the Nemo Outdoor main view, perform the following configurations.
1. Go to View | User Interface Properties.
49
2. On the Measurement page, set the Start recording automatically when devices are
started and Start scripts automatically options to Yes. Click OK.
3. Save the workspace and device configuration files by selecting File | Save
Workspace As, and File | Save Device Configuration As.
4. Close Nemo Outdoor. The next time you start Nemo Outdoor, measurements will start
automatically as long as the correct device configuration file and workspace are
selected.
5.2 Configuring test mobiles

To configure the Nemo Outdoor test mobiles for data testing purposes, see the Device
Configuration Guide provided by Keysight.
PIN Code Request and Automatic Redial options must be turned OFF. Please consult the
mobile user manual to find these options from the mobile.
Always keep the test mobile connected to a charger, if possible, when carrying out
measurements.
50
5.3 Configuration Manager

Configuring Nemo Outdoor for your environment is accomplished in the Configuration
Manager. You can access the view either by pressing Ctrl+M or by clicking Settings the
Configuration Manager toolbar button .
The Configuration Manager view consists of several items. Double-click an item on the list to
edit the item.
The System Properties view shows the general system properties for Nemo Outdoor.
Under Measurement Servers are listed all Nemo Invex measurement servers connected to
the system. Select a server to view some hardware status information for the server.
5.3.1 Configuration Manager - Handler information

Under Handler Information, you will find a list of handlers that have been installed on your
computer. All the handlers that you have purchased can be found in the Nemo Outdoor
product package. Each device has its own handler, and in order to use them in Nemo Outdoor,
you must have the corresponding handler installed.
51
5.3.2 Configuration Manager - User interface
Under the User Interface item, you will find several items. Double-click on the User Interface
Properties item to open the User Interface Properties dialog (see the next chapters for more
information).
The Custom Windows folder contains premade measurement windows for quick startup.
Under Color Palettes you will find colors used in the views (see User Interface Properties –
Colors).
Clicking on Color Sets will display the available color sets in the Configuration Manager view.
For further information on how to create color sets, see chapter Color Set Editor.
You can define the format in which various parameter values are presented through the
Presentation modes item (see User Interface Properties – Presentation).
Operators and CDMA Operators displays a list of operator names along with the respective
MCC and MNC codes. To add new operators to the list, double-click the Operators or CDMA
Operators item in the Configuration Manage and click the Add button. Enter the Operator
name, MCC, and MNC. For CDMA operators, add the operator name and SID.
52
53
5.3.2.1 User Interface Properties – General
Save workspace settings on exit option defines whether the workspace settings are saved
when you exit the SW so that they will be activated automatically, for example, windows will be
opened the next time you start the SW.
Selecting the Show a dialog for critical errors option will display a message box when there
is a problem with one of the devices or with the measurement file writing.
Select the Open Script Status window when script is started option to automatically open
the Script Status window when script files are used in measurements.
Select the Play audio quality samples during playback option to play the audio samples
used in audio quality measurements also during playback.
When the Show welcome window when application is launched option is selected, the
Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window is displayed.
Selecting the Show Close Full Screen window in Full Screen mode option will enable you
to exit the Full Screen mode through an UI button.
With the Show 'Debug log file management' dialog on exit option selected, a dialog with a
list of the logged debug files is displayed when Nemo Outdoor is closed. Debug logging is
activated by running Nemo Outdoor in debug mode. When you run Nemo Outdoor in debug
mode, the text [DEBUG MODE] appears in the title bar. Debug logs are saved and zipped in
the C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Outdoor\DebugLogs folder.
54
When the Include device number in audio notification option is selected, the device
number is included at the beginning of the notification audio alert.
With the Load workspace on startup option you can define which workspace is loaded when
Nemo Outdoor is started.
With the Load hardware configuration on startup option you can define which hardware
configuration is loaded when Nemo Outdoor is started.
With the Start measurement list on startup option you can define which measurement list is
loaded and started when Nemo Outdoor is started.
When the Enable route history option is selected, a GPX (GPS Exchange Format) file is
generated from the measurement. A GPX file is also generated when loading playback files.
GPX is a light-weight XML data format for the interchange of GPS data (waypoints, routes, and
tracks) between applications and web services on the Internet.
Deselect the Calculate statistics parameters option to disable VPE statistics calculation.
This will increase performance, especially in multi-device configurations, but statistics
parameters will not be available.
5.3.2.2 User Interface Properties – Measurement
By double-clicking the Measurement item in the Configuration Manager window you will
access the Measurement tab in the User Interface Properties dialog. Here you can make
settings affecting all measurements.
55
Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-
month-day hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination
of the items below. For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows:
06May31_1. The last number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded
that day. You can also create custom filename templates. See chapter Creating Filename
Templates.
%a Abbreviated weekday name

%A Full weekday name
%b Abbreviated month name
%B Full month name
%d Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31)
%H Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23)
%I Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12)
%j Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366)
%m Month as decimal number (01 – 12)
%M Minute as decimal number (00 – 59)
%n Sequence number (1 – )
%N Sequence number (1 – )
%p Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock
%S Second as decimal number (00 – 59)
%U Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 – 53)
%w Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0)
%W Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 – 53)
%y Year without century, as decimal number (00 – 99)
%Y Year with century, as decimal number
%z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry
settings; no characters if time zone is unknown
%Z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry
settings; no characters if time zone is unknown
With the Start scripts automatically option, you can order Nemo Outdoor to start executing
the script file when you click the Start button in the main window.
Select the Stop measurement after script is finished option to force Nemo Outdoor to stop
recording after the script is finished.
If you are making measurements with multiple devices and multiple scripts, select the
Synchronize script repeats option to force Nemo Outdoor to wait until all scripts for all
devices are finished before repeating the scripts.
With the Force idle mode when stopping scripts option you can force the measurement
mobile to return to idle mode if the script is interrupted. When the option is set to No, the
mobile will stay in the current state when script is stopped. You can use this option to keep a
GPRS mobile in active state when toggling a script on and off.
Please note that it is recommended that with LTE devices this option is set to No. If
attach/ detach commands are needed frequently, for example, with script files it is
suggested that radio off/radio on commands are used instead of attach/detach.
56
Select the Prevent script stopping during connection establishment option to delay the
script stopping if any of the devices has a call or connection attempt ongoing.
Select the Prevent script stopping until all ongoing operations are finished option to
delay the script stopping until all ongoing calls and data transfers are finished.
With the Use time from GPS option you can order Nemo Outdoor to use GPS time at the start
of the measurement. During measurements, Nemo Outdoor will use PC time.
Select the Wait for GPS fix before starting measurement option if you would like to start
measuring only after there is a GPS fix.
Select the Enable automatic measurement pausing option to initiate an automatic pause
when GPS velocity goes under X km/h for X seconds or the GPS position is stale (ie.
coordinates do not change). Logging will be resumed automatically after the GPS velocity
exceeds the user-specified limit X.
GPS time offset value specifies the difference between GPS UTC time and local time. This
offset is used by handlers when GPS time synchronization is performed.
Select the Redial after dropped call option to automatically make a new call if a call is
dropped during measurements. Also define the time in seconds after which the call will be
redialed.
Remove all forcing functions when device is started option deactivates all forcing functions
from the device when the device is started.
When the Use ETSI compatible call connection trigger option is set to Yes, Nemo Outdoor
uses the ETSI specification-based definition of the start and end time of a call.
Enable ETSI call timeout option changes the call attempt timeout to terminate at CAC 2
event. By default, call attempt timeout terminates at CAC 1 event. See the Nemo File Format
specification (click ? in the top-right corner of the main view and select Nemo File Format) for
more information on the events.
With the Routing table modifications for devices option users can enable and disable
routing table modification so that the correct network interface is placed on top just before a
data operation is initiated. This way Windows automatically chooses the correct interface when
the operation is performed.
• Do not modify: no routing table changes are made during the measurement, e.g.
browsing test would be performed using any network interface that happens to be set
as the default gateway in Windows. Routing table modification should be set to Do not
modify only with single data testing. If routing table modification is disabled with multi
data testing, it can cause problems when several data connections are opened from
one host computer to terminals.
• Modify during transfer: this option enables Nemo Outdoor to perform routing table
modifications if data transfer so requires.
• Disable default gateway: this option disables the default gateway from the routing
table. Default gateway is the address to which packets are sent if there is no specific
gateway for a given destination listed in the routing table. This option is mainly for NB-
IoT devices, as some IoT devices show up as Default Network Interface in Windows,
and Windows will start to use this interface to perform any kind of Windows network
operations and, effectively, jam the limited data capacity of IoT devices.
Measurement event buffer size specifies the number of events stored in the history buffer of
the user interface. The buffer size selection is automatic and based on the device count.
• 1-4 devices: 40000
• 5-8 devices: 20000
57
• 9-15 devices: 10000

• 16-24 devices: 5000
• 25+ devices: 2000
Selecting the Start recording automatically when devices are started option enables Nemo
Outdoor to start recording automatically at device startup, and also when changing from offline
mode to online mode.
Selecting the Show report after measurement ends option will display a summary of all test
calls after the measurement is ended.
Selecting the Show send dialog before sending measurement to server option will display
the Send Measurement to Server dialog after the measurement is ended and before the log
files are sent to a server. See chapter Uploading measurement files to server for more
information.
Selecting the Show 'Pause' dialog when measurement is paused option will display a
message when the measurement has been paused.
With the Show ‘Stop Recording Query’ dialog before recording is stopped option
selected, a dialog appears at the end of the measurement to make sure you really want to stop
recording.
Selecting the Start recording when incoming call is received option enables Nemo Outdoor
to start recording automatically when a test call is received.
Select the Compress measurement file(s) option to automatically compress the files below
into a single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are compressed, the original files
are deleted.
• measurement files (.nmf)
• binary files (.nbl)
• packet capture files (.pcap)
• marker files (.mrk)
• indoor map files (.tab and image)
• BTS file (.nbf)
RF offset. In order to prevent measurements with missing/incorrect RF antenna connections,
Nemo Outdoor performs a check when measurement is started. The RXL/RSSI value of each
measured channel/carrier is read from each phone and scanner. The value from each channel
is compared to the highest value from all devices. If the measured value is less than X dB
(=RF offset value) below the highest value, a warning message is displayed to the user with
the channel number and the device name(s). In Remote mode, the offset value X can be set
by Nemo Commander. If a warning message is triggered by the field unit, it is shown in Nemo
Commander.
Select the Include packet capture logs in measurement file upload option to send packet
capture logs during measurement file upload.
When the Enable scanner configuration monitor option is selected, Nemo Outdoor collects
a list of serving cell channels measured by test phones and compares it to a list of channels
configured for scanners connected to the system. If a measured channel is not configured for
any scanner, an error message is displayed.
When the Prevent script starting if E2E server connection test fails option is selected,
Nemo Outdoor verifies the connection to the E2E server before starting a script. If there is no
connection to the server, the script will not start.
58
When the Enable end to end calls when server connection fails option is enabled, the end-
to-end call control configuration allows the originate calls to be made from Nemo Server to a
field unit even if the “receive incoming call” command fails due to a lack of data connectivity
between the field unit and Nemo Server. This ensures that the number of MOC and MTC calls
between the handsets within the same script group are always same.
When the Group end to end call requests option is enabled, the script groups are used to
group the Nemo Server functions. Successful Nemo Server function request in one device
triggers the call action in all other devices of the same group.
When the Toggle terminal radio when phone is started option is enabled, Nemo Outdoor
will execute terminal radio off and terminal radio on commands whenever a phone is started.
Default loudspeaker mode defines whether the computer loudspeaker is muted or unmuted.
5.3.2.3 Creating filename templates
You can create templates for naming measurement log files. The template includes
parameters (tags) and a list of allowed values for each parameter. The template also specifies
the filename format which defines how the tags are used in the filename. The templates can
be exported and imported.
Click the Filename item on the User Interface Properties – Measurement page and select
Create new filename or Edit current filename to open the Filename Editor. Click the Add
button to add a custom parameter.
In the Parameter Editor dialog, type a name for the new parameter. Then click the New button
to add the possible values for the parameter. For example, add a parameter called city and
then add a list of cities where you conduct measurements. Finally click OK to return to the
Filename Editor.
59
The new parameter is listed in the Parameters table. You can add as many parameters as
needed. In the Filename field, define the filename format where you can now use your custom
parameters. For example, %City%m%d%Y. Below, in the Filename field you can see a
preview of what the filename will look like with the selected parameters.
The new filename template can now be selected on the User Interface Properties –
Measurement page in the Filename field.
60
When you start logging, you will be asked to select a value for the custom parameter. This
value will be used in the filename.
61
5.3.2.4 User Interface Properties – Paths
In the Paths tab you can define locations for different files. In the picture above, you can see
the default values. To change the default paths, click on the … button and browse for a new
location. In the Default Map field, you can enter a map file that will be opened by default. A
World.tab map file is provided by Keysight in the installation package. Local Files refers to the
files that are used in FTP testing. Report Files are the files created during timeslot testing.
Default Color Set refers to the color set that is opened by default on the map. For instructions
on making new color sets, see chapter Color Set Editor.
Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files for notifications in the Sounds field, select
C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female if you want to use female sounds or
C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male if you want to use male sounds.
Note that BTS files and script files do not apply to scanners.
62
5.3.2.5 User Interface Properties – Presentation
In the Presentation tab you can define the format in which various parameter values are
presented.
63
5.3.2.6 User Interface Properties – Colors
In the Colors page you can define colors used for devices, graph lines, and map routes. The
first eight colors are reserved for devices. The other colors are used to draw graph lines and
map routes.
To make new palettes, click the New button, type a name for the new palette, and define all
the colors. To change the palette, select a palette from the Color palette list.
5.3.3 Configuration Manager - Notifications

Notifications are graphical, textual, and audio notifications marking certain events. Nemo
Outdoor includes some premade notifications, but you can also add your own notifications.
The notifications come in handy when you are looking for certain events, parameters, or
values in the measurement file. Depending on your configuration, Nemo Outdoor will either
play a sound or display a .png image in a graph/map when the defined event occurs during
measurements. A textual notification is displayed in the Output window by default.
By double-clicking a notification, the Notifications window appears. There you can make
changes to, for example, sound files and icons associated with the notification.
64
5.3.3.1 Notification Configuration

To make your own notifications, select Settings | Notification Manager.
The dialog displays all existing notifications. From the table you can see the notification title
and the selected sound and bitmap file for each notification. Activate a sound and/or bitmap
file for a notification by selecting and clearing the options in the list.
Sound file defines an audio file for the selected notification. Browse a sound file in the field or
use the default file. Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files. In the User Interface
Properties – Paths dialog, define which one you would like to use. Use the Play button to listen
to the file. If you want to attach your own sound files (.wav) to the notifications, you should
create the sound files and add them in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared
Files\Sounds\Male or C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female.
Bitmap file defines a graphical notification for the selected notification. Browse a bitmap file in
the field or use the default file. The button will display a preview of the selected image. If you
want to attach your own bitmaps to the notifications, you should create the files and add them
in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Images.
65
Click the Add button to create new notifications in the Notification Criteria dialog.
Title defines a name for the notification.

Notify when these criteria are met table displays the criteria for the selected notification. You
can define a counter that specifies how many times the notification rules must match
consecutively before the notification is triggered.
Select the parameter that you want to use in the notification. Then define the Operator and
Value for the selected parameter and click Add to list to add the new criteria for the
notification. You can add several criteria for each notification. Finally click OK and the
notification is saved and added in the Notifications dialog where you can attach sound and
bitmap files to the notification.
Select the Notify only once when criteria are met option when you want be notified about
certain events only once.
The notification is also available in the Measurement Properties | Notifications dialog where
you can activate the notification for a specific device. Click the Device notification settings
button in the Devices view. This will open the Measurement Properties, Notifications
dialog. Select the notifications you would like to use in the measurement and click OK.
66
The table displays a list of notifications that can be activated for the selected device.
To make user-configurable notifications:
1. Open the Notifications dialog (Settings | Notification Manager) and click Add.
2. In the Notification Criteria dialog, define the notification criteria and click OK.
3. In the Notifications dialog, select the notification that you just created. Define sound
and bitmap files for the notification and activate them by selecting the options in the
notifications table.
4. Click OK to save the settings.
5.3.4 Configuration Manager - Scripts

Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners.
Under the Scripts item you will find premade scripts and user-defined scripts. Scripts can be
used to perform measurements automatically instead of performing manual calls or data
transfers. Select the Scripts item to open a list of scripts in the Configuration Manager view.
Double-click on any of these scripts to open the Script Editor dialog. In order to select a script
file to be used in a measurement, click the Device script settings button in the Devices view.
67
5.3.5 Configuration Manager - Device configurations

Under Device Configurations, you will find a list of device configuration files (.hwc). A device
configuration contains information on devices and their measurement configurations. You can
use the device configurations to quickly start measurements with Nemo Outdoor without
having to detect and configure the measurement devices each time you start Nemo Outdoor.
You can load a .hwc file by selecting File | Open Device Configuration. Alternatively, you can
load a device configuration when you start Nemo Outdoor by selecting it in the Load device
Configuration dialog. To make new device configurations, add devices manually in Nemo
Outdoor and configure them. When everything is ready, select File | Save Device
Configuration As and type a name for the saved file. The new .hwc file will appear in the
Configuration Manager, Device Configurations folder.
To rename a device configuration, double-click the respective item in the Configuration
Manager and type a new name in the Rename HW Config dialog.
5.3.6 Configuration Manager - Devices
Under the Devices item are listed all the devices that you have connected to Nemo Outdoor.
Note that you can add a new device from the plus icon , and remove a device by selecting
the device and clicking on the minus icon . The table on the right displays information about
the selected device.
Each device (mobile, GPS, and scanner) has its own configuration dialog. Double-clicking on
the device will open the applicable device configuration dialog. These dialogs are presented
next.
68
5.3.6.1 Device configuration for mobiles and modems
The Label field allows you to give a label such as a comment or a name for the phone, and
makes it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label can be
seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the
information is also stored in the log file header.
Trace port and Modem port selections are device-specific. Please refer to the Device
Configuration Guide for more detailed information. Under the Trace port and Modem port
menus, you will find the item New URL. This allows to connect CPE devices that use an
Ethernet-based connection instead of USB.
Kodiak PTT port defines the COM port for a Kodiak PTT device. Please refer to chapter
Kodiak Push-to-Talk for more information.
Nemo Active Testing Application option is used to enable Nemo Active Testing Application.
Select Automatic to enable the option.
Nemo Intelligent Device Interface (NIDI)/Nemo Device Interface (NDI) option is used to
enable NIDI or NDI.
CS data connection option gives a list of all the circuit-switched data connections that have
been configured on your computer. If you are making CS data measurements, select a
connection here. See the Device Configuration Guide provided by Keysight for detailed
instructions for configuring test devices.
PS data connection option gives a list of all the packet-switched data connections that have
been configured on your computer. If you are making PS data measurements, select a
connection here. See the Device Configuration Guide provided by Keysight for detailed
instructions for configuring test devices.
69
When performing AT command-based data measurements with IoT devices, select

Not used as the PS data connection.
Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the
conversion from dBm to dBuV/m. This parameter is needed only if you are using external
antennas. If you are using the internal antenna of each phone, leave these values blank.
Antenna Frequency Antenna Impedance VSWR 1 Max Polarization Cable Cable &
type range gain power loss connector
(dBd)
1140.27 824– 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ 10 W Linear - Mini Low

894/1710– specified vertical 0.55/ Loss 2.5
1880/ freq. -0.82 m, SMA
1850– dB/m male
2170 MHz
1140.26 890– 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ 10 W Linear Mini Low
960/1850– specified vertical Loss 2.5
1990/ freq. m, SMA
1710– male
2170 MHz
Product Code Antenna Model Frequency Band Antenna Gain Device

[dBi]
42101-06 MPLV1700 1700- 2700 MHz 4 dBi PCTEL
R&S
421010-04 PCTEL MLPV OP178H 698-2300 MHz PCTEL
R&S
421010-07* Mobile Mark Mag. 750-1250 MHz 3 dBi on 750-1250 Test UEs
MGRM-UMB-1C & 1650-2700 MHz MHz, 5 dBi on
1650-2700 MHz
421010-08 PCTEL OP178H 698-3000 MHz 3 dBi PCTEL

Test UEs
421022-25 PCTEL OP278H 698-3800 MHz ~1 dBi on 900-2100 PCTEL
MHz Test UEs
0dBi on 2300 MHz
~1dbi on 2600 MHz
~1.5dBi on 3500
MHz
70
The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Keysight or Smarteq. If
you are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers, you will have to ask the antenna
gain and cable loss information from the manufacturer.
Voice quality algorithm defines which voice quality algorithms are used in voice quality
measurements.
If you select the Invex isolation module option, you can also make echo measurements. Select
the Enable echo measurement option to start logging the echo-related parameters. With the
Advanced echo OEM library provided by Opticom it is possible to measure echo from audio
with both PESQ and POLQA algorithms. Echo measurements require an additional license
and it is available with Nemo Invex using a handset isolation module. Echo measurements are
not supported with commercial sound cards, such as, Terratec DMX6 Fire or Maya44.
Select the Nemo audio module option to use the Nemo audio module for voice quality
measurements. You can define the port where the Nemo voice quality unit is connected in the
drop-down menu.
Select the Sound card channel option to use the USB sound card for voice quality
measurements. Select the applicable sound card channel in the drop-down menu.
71
Select the Invex isolation module option to use a terminal with a Nemo Invex isolation
module for voice quality measurements.
Select the Nemo Active Testing Application (NATA) option to use a terminal with Nemo
Active Testing Application for voice quality measurements.
Select the Nemo Intelligent Device Interface (NIDI) or Nemo Device Interface (NDI) option
to use NIDI/NDI units for voice quality measurements.
Select Disabled when you do not wish to carry out voice quality measurements.
Video quality algorithm defines which algorithms are used in video streaming quality
measurements. For more information, see chapter Streaming video quality testing.
After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is
working properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.
Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties
dialog where you can make device-specific measurement settings. You can also enter the
Measurement Properties dialog by clicking the Measurement Settings button in the Devices
view.
5.3.6.2 Device configuration for scanners
In the Label field you can define a suitable label for the device, for example, a name or a
usage purpose, making it easier to identify the device during measurement and post
processing. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement
and playback, and the information is also stored in the log file header.
Port refers to the port to which the scanner is connected.
Baud rate refers to the communication speed.
Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the
conversion from dBm to dBuV/m. This parameter is needed only if you are using external
antennas. If you are using the internal antenna of each phone, leave these values blank.
72
Antenna Frequency Antenna Impedance VSWR 1 Max Polarization Cable Cable &
type range gain (dBd) power loss connector
1140.27 824– 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ 10 W Linear -0.55/ - Mini Low
894/1710– specifie vertical 0.82 Loss 2.5
1880/ d freq. dB/m m, SMA
1850–2170 male
MHz
1140.26 890– 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ 10 W Linear Mini Low
960/1850– specifie vertical Loss 2.5
1990/ d freq. m, SMA
1710–2170 male
MHz
The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Keysight or Smarteq. If
you are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers, you will have to ask the antenna
gain and cable loss information from the manufacturer.
Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties
dialog where you can make device-specific measurement settings.
5.3.6.3 Device configuration for GPS receivers
In the Label field you can define a label for the GPS device, for example, a name or a usage
purpose, making it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The
label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback,
and the information is also stored in the log file header.
Serial port refers to the port to which the GPS receiver is connected.
Baud rate refers to the communication speed. The available values are 1200, 2400, 4800, and
9600.
Data bits, Parity and Stop bits are other communication-related parameters. The available
values for Data bits are 5, 6, 7, and 8, the options for Parity are Even, None, and Odd. The
default value for Stop bits is 1. You should set these values the same as in your GPS. Check
your GPS receiver documentation.
73
5.3.7 Configuration Manager - View groups
Under the View Groups item are listed all the view groups that are currently loaded. View
groups are sets of windows that are open at the same time. You can add a new view group
from the plus icon , and remove a view group by selecting the item and clicking on the minus
icon . When you select a view group in the Configuration Manager, the right-hand panel
displays the views that are saved in the view group. You can define properties for each view
by double-clicking the view name.
• You can quickly switch between the view group tabs with the following quick keys:Ctrl
+ Tab/Ctrl + PageDwn = Next tab (right)
• Ctrl + Shift + Tab/Ctrl + PageUp = Prev tab (left)
• Ctrl + T = New tab
74
5.3.8 Configuration Manager - Workspaces
Under the Workspaces item are listed all the workspace that are currently loaded.
Workspaces are sets of view groups that are open at the same time. You can edit and move
individual views from one view group to another and individual view groups from one
workspace to another. When you select an individual view group, the right-hand panel displays
the views that are saved in the view group. It is also possible to create new view groups.
5.4 Measurement Properties dialog

The Measurement Properties dialog contains several pages and the contents depend on the
device type (mobile or scanner), on the device model, and on the technologies supported by
the device.
75
5.4.1 Measurement Properties – General
Network name field can be used for stating the friendly name for the network (operator) that
Nemo Outdoor measures with the respective test mobile. Note that you should enter the name
yourself, as Nemo Outdoor does not recognize the network that each mobile is using. The
network name is presented in the output files and helps you to recognize which network you
have been monitoring.
BTS file defines the base station file that will be displayed on the map. If you have a GPS
receiver connected to the system, you can view the measurement vehicle on the map and a
line will be drawn from the measurement vehicle to the active base station. Click the … button
to browse for a BTS file (.nbf or .csv).
BTS template file defines how customer-specific BTS data is imported into Nemo Outdoor.
Please refer to chapter
Importing BTS data for more information.
Cell whitelist file is a feature needed in emergency call testing. It specifies a list of cells from
which emergency call testing is possible.
Subscriber number can be entered manually in case the information cannot be read from the
device with AT-commands.
76
5.4.2 Measurement Properties – Measurement

On the Measurement Properties – Measurement page you can define various measurement-
related settings. For example, you can define what services will be tested, which data
protocols are used, and whether layer messages are logged or not. Note that the selection is
device-specific.
5.4.2.1 Services
Voice Call opens the Voice Call dialog.
DTMF characters field can be used to send DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) tones during a
voice call.
Short Messaging Service. See chapter SMS testing for more information.
USSD Message button opens the USSD Testing dialog. See chapter USSD testing for more
information on USSD testing.
Multimedia Messaging Service button opens the Packet Session Settings, MMS dialog. See
chapter MMS testing for more information on MMS testing.
Circuit-Switched Data Call opens the Data Call Properties dialog.
Video Call button opens the Video Call Properties dialog. See chapter Making video calls for
more information.
Packet Session opens the Packet session settings dialog.
Supported Data Protocols opens a list of available data protocols. Clicking the field of a data
protocol will open a dialog for configuring the selected data protocol.
77
Custom AT Commands offers the possibility to run custom AT commands with certain test
terminals. The available commands are device-specific. Type in the AT command and click
Send. The AT commands and responses are saved in the measurement file. You can also
define a list of predefined AT commands that you can access quickly from the Devices view.
Incoming call option opens the Incoming Call Configuration dialog. See chapter Receive call
for more information.
78
5.4.2.2 Measurement options

Under Measurement Options you can enable and disable various measurement options,
such as layer messages. If you disable some of the options, the disabled messages will not be
recorded in the measurement file. This will decrease output file size. The selection depends on
the measurement device used and some of them are available only when a device is in online
mode. These options are also accessible through the Devices view.
When the EVRC MOS compensation option is enabled, the Evaluation of Speech Quality
(PESQ) tool is biased against the Enhanced Variable Rate Codec (EVRC) used in CDMA
networks and other codecs in this family (EVRC-B and EVRC-WB). MOS value is incremented
by 0.318MOS.
Incoming call mode defines how incoming calls are handled. The options are answer, reject,
and ignore. You can also define a delay (in seconds) when the Answer option is selected. If
you select Answer, you can further define a list of numbers from which calls are allowed. Calls
from all other numbers will be rejected. Click the … next to the Incoming call mode field. In the
Allowed Incoming Call Numbers dialog, define the allowed phone numbers in format CC
(NDC) SN where:
• CC = country code (optional)
• NDC = national destination code (in parentheses, mandatory)
• SN = subscriber number (mandatory)
For example, 358 (50) 1234567.
79
With Qualcomm and Shannon-based devices, you can enable/disable the IMS mode. When
IMS is disabled only CS call type is allowed and VoLTE, ViLTE, VoWiFi and ViWiFi call types
are disabled. When IMS is enabled, CS call, VoLTE, ViLTE, VoWiFi and ViWiFi calls are
enabled. In script commands, the IMS enable/disable commands are available under forcing
functions.
With Qualcomm-based terminals there are several different Voice call methods. Voice call
method is device specific. Trace interface 2 method should be used with MultiRAB testing.
When a voice call is terminated, the PS data connection might be released with UEs using the
Trace interface call method to make voice calls. In such a case, it is recommended to use the
Trace interface 2 call method. Please check the Device Configuration Guide or release note
for device-specific information.
With Qualcomm-based terminals there is a number of different Video call methods and the
correct method must be selected to be able to make video call testing.
80
With the Select AMR codecs option, you can force a device to use a certain AMR codec
mode. For example, when a UE is forced to the WCDMA AMR WB codec, it can freely use any
WB AMR codec from 6.6 kbps to 23.85 kbps.
Note that the Enable RLC Data messages item should not be enabled with data
connections 384kbit/s or higher as this may cause instability in the measurement
terminal.
To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet
decoding function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full logging or
Partial logging in the IP packet monitor field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated
for the measurement. This file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same
folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in packet decoder grids
in Nemo Outdoor.
NATA Browser defines which web browser is used for browser testing when NATA is installed
on the test device.
5.4.2.3 Measurement settings

With the Force detach when entering idle mode option selected, a detach is forced when
the measurement device enters idle mode.
Enable diagnostic data logging option enables/disables Qualcomm or Samsung diagnostic
data (raw trace data) logging. When diagnostic data logging is enabled, you can select trace
data to be stored in a separate binary file (.dlf for Qualcomm and .nmfb for Samsung). The file
can be opened and played back with Nemo Outdoor and diagnostic data messages can be
decoded for further analysis. This functionality requires the Diagnostics Data Logging option.
81
Due to a high sample rate, the diagnostic data logging option should not be activated
during a normal drive test.
Predefined set is a set of log codes for Qualcomm raw diagnostic logging that can be
imported into Nemo Outdoor with a .dmc file. This functionality is not available for Samsung
devices.
82
5.4.3 Measurement Properties – Frequency scanning with mobiles

Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the
terminal supports frequency scanning.
Enable frequency scanning option must be selected to activate frequency scanning for the
mobile.
The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest channels in GSM.
With Top-N scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band, e.g. for EGSM,
GSM900 and GSM1800. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different
operators.
Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. BSIC
threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports.
When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information
event (NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for
example, in a grid view.
If you select BSIC decoding or Missing neighbor detection, click the Select Channels
button to define the channels to be scanned.
83
Select the Show channels as frequencies option to view the channels in MHz.
In the Band drop-down menu you can select a band from which to view channels from in the
Available view. If you select All in the Band drop-down menu, channels from all bands will be
viewed. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan.
The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. To add
channels to the Selected list, click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add
button or simply double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list. To select all available
channels for scanning, click the Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to
type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. If all bands
are selected, you have the possibility to select Remove All | ... items from every band.
Alternatively, if only one band is selected you can remove only items from the current band
through Remove All | ...items from current band.
If you select the Top-N option, click the Top-N Configuration button to select channels.
84
In the Top-N Configuration dialog you can set the Start and Stop ARFCN range between
which the Top-N channels are recorded. Define the number of strongest channels to be
searched in the Top-N field. The maximum number of Top-N channels is 32. You can click on
the Clear all button to clear the table.
85
5.4.4 Measurement Properties – Pilot scanning with mobiles

Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the
terminal supports pilot scanning.
The Enable pilot scanning option must be selected to activate pilot scanning for the mobile.
Select a value for the CPICH RSCP threshold field. The device will only report cells with
CPICH RSCP above the set value.
The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest pilots in UMTS. With
Top-N scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band. The benefits also
include the possibility to benchmark different operators.
When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information
event (NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for
example, in a grid view.
Click the Top-N Configuration button to enter the Select Channels dialog.
86
5.4.5 Measurement Properties – Frequency, pilot, and spectrum scanning with scanners
Please refer to the Nemo Scanner Guide included in the product package.
5.4.6 Measurement Properties - Script

In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement, click the Device Script Settings
button in the Devices window.
In the Script file field, browse the script file that you want to use. There are some premade
script files available but you can also create your own in the Script Editor.
With Nemo Outdoor you can define multiple script synchronization groups. The scripts in the
same group are synchronized with each other. Devices can be assigned for certain script
groups. By default the script group is selected as <None>, but the user can also create new
script groups by selecting <New group> in the Script group drop-down menu, and typing the
name of the new script group in the field. A script group can be also saved with a specific
name. To be able to use script groups, the Synchronize script repeats option must be
selected in the User Interface Properties (see User Interface Properties – Measurement).
When a script group is selected as <None>, but Synchronize script repeats option is
selected, all script files that belong to the same <None> group are synchronized.
87
Script groups can be used, e.g., with Nemo Outdoor multi configuration including two voice
quality terminals and two USB modems performing PS data transfers simultaneously. For
example, script files used with voice quality terminals belong to the same script group, and
their script files are synchronized with one another, whereas the PS data scripts belong to the
second script group. The script synchronization settings need to be configured separately for
each device.
88
6 During Measurements
When Nemo Outdoor is performing the user defined test measurement, you can view the
process in a number of graphs, grids, and maps. The graph and grid windows are fully user
configurable. In the following chapters, the most common tasks are presented in more detail
and some examples are given to illustrate their use. If you have any problems in starting the
measurements, see chapter Troubleshooting.
89
6.1 Textual notes

It is possible to add textual notes at points of interest during measurements and during
playback. Click the Add Textual Note button in the toolbar. Note that you need to start
recording before the button is activated.
You can either type the note in the field or select a predefined text and click OK. To save new
predefined notes, type in the text, click the arrow next to the OK button and select Add
predefined text. Next time the text will be available in the drop-down menu at the top.
The textual notes can be viewed during playback, for example, in an events grid.
6.2 Nemo Cloud

Nemo Cloud is an optional feature for web-based remote-controlled measurements. In Nemo
Outdoor it can be purchased as Basic (with file synchronization, remote control and
monitoring) or Premium (with file synchronization, remote control, automatic sessions and
monitoring).
To log in to Nemo Cloud, go to Nemo Cloud page in the ribbon bar and click Settings to open
the Nemo Cloud settings dialog.
90
Enter the service address, username, password, and network interface to connect to Nemo
Cloud.
You can also add the name of the driver performing the test drive and the driver’s phone
number.
If the Enable backup option is selected, a local copy of the measurement files sent to Nemo
Cloud will be made on the Nemo Outdoor laptop.
Note that Nemo Outdoor uses by default the topmost network interface in the
Windows routing table when communicating with Nemo Cloud. To manually select the
interface, please see chapter Changing the priority order of network interfaces.
The Output feed displays the status of the connection.
After logging to Nemo Cloud you need to activate the Remote Mode. Select Go to Remote
Mode in the ribbon bar. When the remote mode is enabled the button displays the option Go
to Normal Mode. In remote mode the Nemo Outdoor unit is controlled through Nemo Cloud
whereas in normal mode, control is done through the Nemo Outdoor unit. Once the remote
mode is activated, an automated maintenance operation will be performed. It is also possible
to perform maintenance manually by selecting Maintenance in the ribbon bar.
When the remote mode is enabled, click Maintenance.

Note that you need to perform the maintenance session manually in Nemo Outdoor
before you can assign the Nemo Outdoor unit to projects in Nemo Cloud. The unit is
displayed in the unit list on the Dashboard page before performing the maintenance
session but is not displayed as an available unit when creating a project. After
maintenance is performed the unit list on Nemo Cloud is updated and the unit can be
assigned to projects.
Once logged in to Nemo Cloud you are able to view information about your Nemo Cloud option
by clicking the About Nemo Cloud button on the ribbon bar.
Settings opens the Nemo Cloud connection settings dialog.
Web interface opens the Nemo Cloud web interface.
Logout logs the Nemo Outdoor unit out from Nemo Cloud. The unit is still displayed on the
unit list in Nemo Cloud but in offline state.
Exp. date displays the expiration date of the product licence.
Unit ID displays the Nemo Outdoor device MAC address.
91
Username displays the user name created in Nemo Cloud.

Active project displays the name of the active project (if there is one) assigned to the unit.
Close closes the About Nemo Cloud dialog.
When there is an active project run on the unit from Nemo Cloud, information regarding the
measurement session is displayed on the Output feed and on the Remote sessions view on
Nemo Outdoor.
With automatic sessions (Nemo Cloud Premium Only) unit configuration is downloaded and
unit reports and measurement files are sent automatically at regular intervals based on unit
configuration. For manually uploading files with Nemo Cloud, select Nemo Cloud | Manage
Files in the Ribbon bar. You can drag and drop files to make copies between local folder and
Nemo Cloud. For example, script files can be uploaded through Manage files. However, to
upload measurement files, maintenance is required. It can be done afterwards for example
through WiFi connection.
92
Status information about Nemo Cloud is displayed under the ribbon bar. Status shows when
Nemo Cloud is in remote mode, or for example recording. Output window shows updated
information about data and configurations that are sent between the unit and Nemo Cloud.
For send options with Nemo Cloud, see Nemo Cloud send options.
For more information about Nemo Cloud, see Nemo Cloud user manual.
6.2.1 Changing the priority order of network interfaces

Nemo Outdoor uses by default the topmost network interface in the Windows routing table
when communicating with Nemo Cloud. Typically the LAN/WiFi interface will get the highest
priority automatically. This can be changed manually by changing the priority order of network
interfaces.
Windows uses an automatic metric feature to prioritize certain interfaces over others.
However, you can override the automatic setting and set the metric value manually.
To configure the Automatic Metric feature:
93
1. In Control Panel, double-click Network Connections.

2. Right-click a network interface, and then select Properties.
3. Click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties.

4. On the General page, click Advanced.
94
5. On the IP Settings page, clear the Automatic metric option and enter the metric that you
want in the Interface metric field.
Lower value means higher priority, but avoid using ‘1’ as this is typically reserved for
loopback address.
6.2.2 Work orders

Work orders are pre-configured sessions that contain all the necessary information and files
needed for specific measurements. The work orders are non-scheduled, i.e. they do not have
an exact start and stop time. Instead, the test engineer can select from available work orders
and decide when to run them.
Work orders are created in Nemo Cloud and sent to measurement units during a maintenance
session. Please refer to the Nemo Cloud user guide for more information on creating work
orders.
After performing a maintenance session with Nemo Outdoor, the available work orders appear
in the Remote Sessions view.
Click Activate session to select the work order that you would like to run.
You will need to start recording manually.
95
When the work order is complete, stop the measurement. Depending on your project settings,
the measurement files will be uploaded to Nemo Cloud or Nemo Xynergy in the next
maintenance session.
6.3 Making scanning measurements

Please refer to the Nemo Scanner Guide for information on scanner measurements.
6.4 Making voice calls

To make voice calls:
1. In the Measurement Properties, Measurement page (see Measurement Properties
– Measurement), insert the phone number that you wish to use in the test call in the
Voice Call field. Click OK.
2. Select Start Voice Call from the Measurement Control menu in Devices view or run
a script.
96
Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement
manually until the script is finished or you stop the script manually.
3. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Voice Call from the
Measurement Control menu in Devices view. If you are running a script, wait until
the script is finished.
Call type in the call attempt event (CAA) is written as a voice call, not VoLTE or WLAN
IMS voice call when a call is generated via Nemo Outdoor user interface. This is
because the call type is unknown at the time of the call attempt. Call type in the call
connection event (CAC) should be observed.
With networks using encryption, it is required to perform radio off/ radio on for the
VoLTE/ VoWifi/ ViWifi and wait ~40 seconds. During this time, SIP server registering
is shown in the user interface even if the UE is already registered. After this,
measurements can proceed normally.
During recording, the user cannot enable WLAN measurements. WLAN measurement
needs to be enabled before starting measurement. In this case, the user needs to
enable WLAN from the device UI manually.
When enabling WLAN measurement from Nemo Outdoor, a notification Turning on

Wi-Fi will turn off USB Tethering. Continue? is shown in device UI. WLAN will not be
activated before user responds to the dialog. This dialog will not affect the
functionality, the connection between NATA and Nemo Outdoor stays active.
If the device is in Airplane Mode and WLAN is activated, device handler starting may
fail.
”SIP server registration type” is not updated until the next SIPREGA/SIPREGC events
are written. Information is also not updated with WLAN IMS voice -> LTE IMS voice
and LTE IMS voice -> WLAN IMS voice events.
If WLAN is disconnected/disabled, WLAN IMS SIP server registered status stays

visible in Nemo Outdoor UI.
97
6.4.1 Voice Call Settings

Voice call settings are needed to establish the voice calls and to make voice quality
measurements. Click the Voice Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement
dialog and the Voice Call Settings dialog will be opened. The dialog has two pages: one for
outgoing calls and one for incoming calls.
98
Phone number type

• Fixed phone number: Define the number to be called. It must be a valid phone
number. The number must be such that the line stays open for a user-defined time
and some speech or sound is transferred on the line. The Phone number field can
contain up to 17 characters.
• Speed dial: Select a speed dial number from the dropdown menu. Click the Editor
button to define new speed dial slots.
• Device number: Select the device sequence number. Also define the device’s
subscriber number in the Measurement Properties – General page.
Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds.
• Fixed: The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The range of
duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the maximum value of this
parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts
parameter.
• Random: In addition to a fixed call duration, you can specify a random call duration by
specifying the minimum and maximum values in seconds. The call duration will be
randomly selected between the specified values during measurements.
Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call
attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel,
the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the
Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least
10 seconds.
When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to
Nemo Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally
DTMF tones do not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone
lines (PSTN) user must define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo
Server manager application. If ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are
selected to be sent also caller id to Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically.
Note that this functionality requires Nemo Server version 2.5.0 or later.
When Wait for call connection is selected, a call script will not move on to the next command
before a traffic channel is allocated (CAC1 event is received). When the option is not selected,
the script will move on to the next command immediately after a voice call has been initiated
(CAA event is received).
99
Select the Enable end-to-end call option to activate voice call synchronization between two
devices connected to the same Nemo Outdoor system or between a device and Nemo Server.
Select the Nemo Server option as mode to enable voice call synchronization between a
device and Nemo Server. Nemo Server Settings button opens the HTTPS Options dialog
where you can define connection settings.
Select the Local device option as mode to activate end-to-end voice calls between two
devices connected to the same Nemo Outdoor system.
Own number defines the A-party phone number.
Call reception timeout defines the max. time to receive the incoming call. If call is not
received within the timeout, call attempt failure with the cause “Incoming call not received” is
written to the log file.
Select the Enable voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the
voice quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.
Audio mode defines which party, A or B, starts the audio transmission. In Normal mode, the
caller party starts with audio transmission and in Reverse mode the caller starts with audio
reception.
Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio
sample is compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples
are of 8KHz sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than six seconds in
length. With the Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR
testing) and sample length a maximum of 30 seconds. For ECHO measurements, use one of
the following samples: 10s.wav, 4s_m.wav, 8s.wav, ru_6s.wav, and ru_6s_wb.wav.
Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.
Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received
audio sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a
prefix is defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where
prefix is the user-defined prefix, mos the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal
precision but without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format.
For example: terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav.
Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are
saved. The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The
default threshold value is 5, which means that all samples are saved.
Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through
the Script Editor.
Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server, the
delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at
least 10 seconds.
CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call.
Note that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA
mobile.
Tetra specific - Call type (enabled only for TETRA devices) defines what kind of calls will be
made. There are five different options in TETRA networks: duplex, semiduplex, group, direct,
and PSTN.
• Duplex: Normal call between two terminals; both parties can speak at the same time
100
• Semiduplex: Call between two terminals, but only one party can speak at a time by
pressing the PTT (Press-to-Talk) button
• Group: Call from one terminal to a group; all terminals having that group active can
listen, and by pressing the PTT button, also speak
• Direct: Call between terminals which bypasses the network, by means of the PTT
button
• PSTN: Call from terminal to fixed line or to another cellular mobile
6.5 Custom application calls

With the custom application call functionality, you can use any Android application to make
voice calls and voice quality measurements. Define the call settings in the Custom Application
Call Settings dialog and then make manual calls from the Device Control menu by selecting
Start Custom Application Call or Wait Incoming Custom Application Call.
101
6.6 Push-to-Talk (PTT) testing

Nemo Outdoor supports QChat (developed by Qualcomm) and Kodiak Push-to-Talk (PTT)
technologies. QChat Push-to-Talk (PTT) calls must be performed using the keypad of the
phone when used with Nemo Outdoor. Kodiak PTT calls can be made using UI commands in
Nemo Outdoor.
Normal call events and statistics are written when attempting or ending PTT calls. Different
states of PTT calls, such as idle, getting ready to receive, receiving, transmitting are written to
VCHI event. Please see the file format specification for further information. RTP packets are
recorded and decoded with Nemo Outdoor. Qchat and Kodiak PTT are optional features in
Nemo Outdoor and require a license option.
6.6.1 Kodiak Push-to-Talk

Kodiak PTT devices are connected with Nemo Outdoor as Bluetooth devices. After the device
has been paired with the laptop, check the COM port number from the Windows Bluetooth
Devices dialog.
Start Nemo Outdoor and add the device (Add New Device | Phone | Qualcomm). In the
Device Configuration dialog, select the COM port assigned for your device in the Kodiak PTT
port field and click OK.
102
In the Measurement Properties – Measurement page, double-click the Kodiak PTT call item to
open the Kodiak Call Configuration dialog.
103
Call type defines what kind of call will be made. The options are one to one, one to many, and
group call.
Recipients defines to whom the call is made. The recipients are selected from the contact list
of the Kodiak application and are defined as index numbers. For example, if you would like to
make a call to the first contact on the contact list, enter 0. If the selected call type is one to
many, define several recipients and separate the index numbers with semicolons. If the
selected call type is group call, select the recipient from the group contact list of the Kodiak
application and again, use the index number.
After the call type and recipients have been defined, select Register Kodiak Server to login to
the Kodiak server.
After you have registered to the Kodiak server you can start a Kodiak call.
104
Once the Kodiak call has been established, select Press PTT Button/Release PTT Button.
From Events grids, you can observe the Kodiak call events.
105
In addition to calls, you can send IPAs. Go to Measurement Properties – Measurement and
double-click the Instant Personal Alert item. Define the recipient (only one at a time) and click
Send Message.
6.7 Voice quality measurements

Nemo voice quality is an option for the Nemo Outdoor measurement system. Nemo Outdoor
supports mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements. The measurements
enable the assessment of the quality of voice during voice calls as perceived by end-users.
The measurement is based on the ITU-T recommendations P.862.1, P862.2, and P863 and it
produces a voice quality score that is mapped on an EMOS (Estimated Mean Opinion Score)
scale. Also measurements based on the WB-AMR codec are supported. Nemo Outdoor
supports voice quality measurements with Nemo Active Testing Application running on
Android-based smartphones and with Nemo Intelligent Device Interface (NIDI).
The Nemo voice quality system with Nemo Active Testing Application consists of Nemo
Outdoor, Android-based smartphones, and optionally the Nemo Outdoor Carrying Case. It is
supported with the Nemo Outdoor platform, and it supports the USB 2.0 audio system, four
channels, and the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA2000, and TD-SCDMA technologies.
The Nemo voice quality system with Nemo Intelligent Device Interface (NIDI) consists of Nemo
Outdoor and Android-based smartphones.
In mobile-to-mobile measurements, one terminal is calling another and the mobiles send a test
sample. These measurements present the combination of the uplink quality of the transmitting
terminal and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal.
In mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements, a terminal calls a fixed number (PSTN) that is
connected to a Nemo Server with the Audiotest option. These measurements present the
downlink quality of the terminal at the Nemo Outdoor end, the uplink quality of the terminal at
the server end, and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal.
6.7.1 System description - mobile-to-fixed line

When Nemo Outdoor calls a fixed line that is connected to Nemo Server, the server answers
the call and Nemo Outdoor starts sending the configured test sample. The server is already
configured to use the same sample. After the first sample is received, the server sends in turn
the reference sample to Nemo Outdoor that records it and calculates the voice quality score
(MOS DL). Server side calculates scores for received samples in parallel to the testing
procedure, and opens a measurement file and stores the result there.
Along with the test samples, short synchronization tones are sent. They are used for
synchronization purposes and do not affect the score. The synchronization tone is always sent
from the side which sends the audio sample. For example, with mobile-to-fixed-line testing
synchronization tone is sent first from the mobile to the server.
106
After receiving the test sample, Nemo Outdoor sends again the reference sample to the
server, the server records it and calculates the score (MOS UL), and so on until the call is
disconnected.
The measurement file on server side is closed when the call is disconnected and
FilecloseTimeout seconds is elapsed from disconnection (default 200s). The test goes on
alternating until a call drops, or until Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Server ends the call. If the server
does not detect the call disconnection, for example, it cannot detect the busy tone because the
country code is wrong, the server does not hang up the line. In this case, use NSM to stop the
VQD service and change the country code. If it does not help, consult the Nemo Server
manual for further instructions.
6.7.2 System description - mobile-to-mobile

The same logic is used also in mobile-to-mobile testing as with mobile-to-fixed line.
PSTN lines of Nemo Server must be calibrated before use.
Busy call detection wizard of Nemo Server must be used before testing.
6.7.3 Nemo Server remote configuration

Nemo Server remote control allows field units to issue commands to Nemo Server and to
configure and query a subset of Nemo Server settings before and during measurements. Real-
time commands are needed to match the call event count of the server and the field in
abnormal situations, such as, when a call does not connect or the call goes to voicemail,
provided that data connection is successful in the first place.
Communication between a field unit and Nemo Server is done over a packet data connection
using the Nemo Server API interface (HTTP API). Internet access is required for Nemo Server.
Servers without internet access use the existing method (DTMF) to order voice call callback.
As opposed to DTMF, a packet data connection does not require a preliminary call to the
server to send the predefined call sequence information before an actual measurement
session. Enabling the Nemo Server connection via a packet connection also makes it possible
to start a measurement session with an MTC call where the Nemo Server initiates a call which
is answered by the field unit. All voice quality call related settings from Nemo Outdoor are
synchronized with Nemo Server. Packet connection is the preferred method for call
synchronization between the field unit and Nemo Server. Automatic callback option under the
channel definitions on Nemo Server should be off.
107
6.7.4 Nemo Server settings

The following Nemo Server related settings can be configured via Nemo Outdoor user
interface:
Phone number defines the server phone number (line number/ B-party phone number)
Call reception timeout defines the max. time to receive the incoming call. If call is not
received within the timeout, call attempt failure with the cause “Incoming call not received” is
written to the log file.
Enable Nemo Server connection opens the HTTPS Options dialog where you can define
connection settings.
108
Global options like CountryCode and FileCloseTimeout cannot be controlled at all as they are
adjusted once when the Nemo Server is installed and there is no reason to touch them
afterwards unless server is moved or lines changed or so, that require new installation anyway
by local user.
Only one channel can be controlled and/or configured with single request as there is only one
RemoteNumber parameter. Supplied channel parameters are permanent until changed by new
request.
Nemo Server version 4.40 or later is required.
The following example script file can be used to start voice quality testing between field unit
and fixed end initiated by fixed end (Nemo Server).
Script must be started by adding the Receive call command specifying call duration, call
reception timeout value and end to end call control settings including own number and server
line number that will be used to execute the callback to field unit. Check that callback setting
for a particular channel on Nemo Server is set to off. This must be done via Nemo Server user
interface. Continue to build the script by adding the make voice call command and specify all
required settings for voice quality call and also end to end call control settings.
109
Figure 1. Voice quality call script initiated with MTC.
Figure 2. Nemo Server channel definitions. Callback.
6.7.5 Mute call detection

Sometimes end users are experiencing random audio muting during phone calls. When a call
is answered, only silence can be heard.
When audio is lost during a phone call, usually it remains silent until the end of the call. These
calls can be seen also by observing the audio quality MOS score as it drops significantly
during silent calls. The mute call detection functionality in Nemo Outdoor makes it easy to
analyze phone calls where low MOS score is caused by a silent or muted call.
A parameter called “Audio reception state” is displayed real-time and it indicates if audio is
present or not. During RX mode the voice quality measurement system is monitoring the
energy of the received signal continuously for each received audio frame and writes audio
quality signal status to the measurement file. If the energy of the received signal drops below
specified threshold for specified amount of time, the audio reception state is set to “Not
detected”. If the energy of the received signal goes above specified threshold for specified
amount of time, the audio reception state is set to “Detected”. Threshold values are fixed.
110
Audio reception state can be seen in different views e.g. with line graph. Detection starts when
phone audio mode is in reception (RX) mode. Synchronization tone can be seen at the
beginning of the RX mode followed by the actual received audio sample file. Depending on the
reference sample file it is normal that during the reception of the received sample file, audio is
not necessarily detected all the time. E.g. the case sample file includes a pause in audio
longer than threshold value used for the detection.
Figure 3. Audio RX mode. Normal situation.
Audio lost
Figure 4. Silent call. Audio not detected.
111
Audio lost.
Muted call
Figure 5. Muted call. Audio lost during call. DL MOS scores seen as low as 1.49MOS.
Figure 6. Audio gap. Lost audio frames during RX mode.
6.7.6 Test sample requirements

You will receive some default test samples along with Nemo Outdoor but if you wish to use
your own samples, please read the requirements below.
Test sample requirements:
• 8kHz, 16kHz or 48kHz sampling rate (narrowband NB, wideband WB and super-
wideband SWB)
• 16-bit linear PCM
• Signal scaled to 90% of full scale
• PESQ-NB: Band-pass filtered with corner frequencies at 250Hz and 3500Hz
• POLQA-NB: Band-pass filtered with corner frequencies at 50Hz and 3800Hz
• PESQ-WB: Band-pass filtered with corner frequencies at 50Hz and 7400Hz
• POLQA-SWB: Band-pass filtered with corner frequencies at 50Hz and 14000Hz
• Minimum/maximum durations for sample: 4s / 10s.
• Speech activity between 60-80%
• Leading and trailing silences: 0.5s
112
NB-samples can be used in PESQ and POLQA testing. Note that samples that do not have NB
or SWB in the file name are NB samples.
SWB-samples can be used in mobile-to-mobile WB-AMR testing.
6.7.7 Simultaneous PESQ and POLQA measurements

When analyzing PESQ/POLQA results it is important to know which version, narrowband or
wideband, of the algorithm was used. Although both versions will generate MOS scores on the
same five point scale, it is strictly forbidden to mix wideband (WB) and narrowband (NB)
results. If wideband networks have to be compared to narrowband networks, then the
wideband version of PESQ/POLQA algorithm has to be used in both cases.
In general, the scores achieved in good conditions with POLQA are generally higher than
PESQ scores for the same samples. In addition, the POLQA-WB maximum score has been
increased to 4.75MOS (it is still 4.5MOS for NB). As a result, POLQA may occasionally score
4.5MOS in good conditions that will never happen with PESQ. Both algorithms are commonly
used at the moment but it is estimated that when WB, SWB codecs, and VoLTE are widely in
use, POLQA will become commonly adopted by operators. Therefore, side by side live
comparison of these two algorithms is needed during this transition phase. Comparison can be
done with Nemo Outdoor where both PESQ and POLQA MOS scores are calculated
simultaneously.
To activate both PESQ and POLQA measurements, go to Device Configuration –
Voice/video quality page and select both options. Note that both PESQ and POLQA voice
quality options are required.
6.7.8 Mobile-to-mobile VQ measurements
Note that the mobile must NOT be in silent mode during measurements, as it may
impair sample flow from the terminal.
Remember to switch off the alert and warning tones. Beeping during a measurement
will lower the score.
1. Define the voice quality settings for the first mobile, i.e., the mobile that you are calling
from.
2. Open the Measurement Properties, Script dialog for the first mobile (Measurement |
<device> | Script Properties). Click on the Script Editor button to create a new
script.
3. In the Script Editor, click Add and select Voice Call from the menu.
113
4. In the Nemo Outdoor Voice Call Settings dialog:

• Define the outgoing phone number of the second mobile, i.e., the mobile that you are
calling.
• Select Request voice call callback if you want the application to send callback
command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones.
• Select the Enable voice quality option.
• Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field. Click
OK.
114
5. In the Script Editor dialog, double-click on the End a voice call item to define whether
end command type is normal or forced. Define how many times you would like to
repeat the script by editing the Repeat Script parameter.
115
6. Click Save and type a file name for the script. Finally click Close.
7. Next, define the voice quality settings for the second mobile, i.e., the mobile that you
are calling to.
8. Open the Measurement Properties dialog for the second mobile (Measurement |
<device> | Measurement Properties).
9. In the Measurement Properties – Measurement page, double-click the Voice Call
item.
116
10. In the Voice Call Settings dialog:

• Select the Enable voice quality option
• Select Request voice call callback if you want the application to send callback
command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones.
• Define a Prefix for the received files. The prefix will be added at the beginning of the
file name of all received files.
• Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field. Select
the same file as for the other mobile. Click OK.
117
11. Click the Start Recording button. Click the Start Scripts button to start the
measurement. Nemo Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality
measurements.
6.7.9 Mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile VQ measurements
Please complete the Nemo Server installation before continuing. See Nemo Server
manual for detailed instructions.
1. Connect the test mobiles to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system.
Note that the mobile must NOT be in silent mode during measurements, as it may
impair sample flow from the terminal.
2. Define the voice quality settings in the Voice Call Settings dialog:
• Select one of the default test samples. Make sure that the server has the same
samples in its reference sample folder (see Nemo Server manual for details).
3. If you are using scripts, click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement. Nemo
Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality measurements.
118
4. If you are performing measurements manually, select Start Voice Call from the
Measurement menu or by clicking the Device Commands button. With each voice
call, the voice quality measurement is run.
5. Define the voice quality settings for the mobile.
• Open the Measurement Properties, Script dialog for the mobile (Measurement |
<device> | Script Properties).
• Click the Script Editor button to create a new script.
6. In the Script Editor, click Add and select Voice Call from the menu.
7. In the Voice Call Settings dialog:

• Select Enable end to end call.
119
• Define settings for the fixed end, i.e., the Nemo server that is answering the calls and
sending back the samples.
• Select the Voice Quality option.
• Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field.
Please make sure that the same reference file exists also on the server. Click OK.
8. In the Script Editor dialog, define how many times you would like to repeat the script
by editing the Repeat Script parameter.
120
9. Click Save and type a file name for the script. Finally click Close.
10. Click the Start Recording button. Click the Start Scripts button to start the
measurement. Nemo Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality
measurements.
6.7.10 End-to-end call instructions

In the User Interface Properties – Measurement (Settings | User interface properties |
Measurement) dialog, set option Use ETSI compatible call connection trigger to Yes. With this
option, the call duration will be calculated from Alerting (CAC2) to Call disconnect (CAD). It
corresponds better to the call duration seen by the server. By default, call duration is
calculated from Traffic channel allocated (CAC1) to Call disconnect (CAD).
Set option Enable end to end calls when server connection fails to Yes. With this option
Nemo Outdoor will perform the MO call, even if HTTP commands to the server would fail.
121
6.7.10.1 Nemo Outdoor script settings
1. When end-to-end call synchronization is used, all the devices must have the same
group ID, which can be set in device script settings as the Script group.
2. Devices in the same script group must use the same script files. Only the line number
and the own number can be different between scripts on different devices. Other call
settings must be the same. Otherwise, the server will not be able to predict the
behavior of the different terminals in the group correctly.
122
It is mandatory to set a Wait for script synchronization command before the MO or MT

calls. Always use wait commands between call commands. The minimum wait time
should be 10 sec.
Figure 7. Mobile originated call settings (make a voice call)
123
Figure 8. Incoming call setting (receive call)
3. Own number (subscriber telephone number) must be defined in both Make a voice
call and Receive call commands.
4. Server line (Nemo Server phone number) must be defined in the Receive call
command.
5. Only end-to-end call settings should be defined. For example, the Request voice call
callback in Voice Call Configuration must be set to No.
124
Figure 9. Nemo e2e server settings
6. Nemo Server settings are global settings that are written in the PC registry. This
means that these settings are not transferred within a script file. If the script files are
copied from a Control PC to another user, these settings must be written again.
6.7.10.2 Nemo Server configuration
1. Channel callback settings must be set to off.
2. Configure all server channels with correct RemoteNumbers and LineNumbers before
making any end-to-end commands.
3. Restart the VQD service after channel configuration is done and each time the
configuration is changed.
4. If measurements are stopped and restarted, wait for 200 seconds between the
changes so that the possibly running server side timers are finished before the new
test begins.
5. If grouping is changed so that, for example, one handset is removed from the script
group, change the group name. Otherwise the grouping stays the same on the server
side also for channels that were part of the last group. Alternatively, configure the
removed handset with an empty group and let it command the server once to clear
the group from that channel.
6. Make a configuration command (e.g. one test call cycle) on good RF conditions.
125
Nemo Server side grouping stays valid until automatic service restart happens at 3:00
am. A new configuration command executed by the field unit is required on daily
basis. Also when the VQD service is stopped or started or when the Nemo Server is
shut down or rebooted.
6.7.10.3 Starting a measurement and running a script

It is important, that after starting a measurement, the HTTP commands go through from all the
terminals to the server at least once. This enables the server to synchronize and detect all the
devices belonging to the same group.
When changing from synchronized measurements to non-synchronized or individual

tests, the field user has to wait at least until the server-side parameter
FileCloseTimeout (seconds) has been elapsed from the end of the last call. This is
because the server purges the channel grouping only after the measurement file is
closed for all group channels. By default the FileCloseTimeout is 200 seconds.
6.7.10.4 Configuring manual end-to-end voice calls

With Nemo Outdoor it is possible to make end-to-end voice call testing between two devices
connected to the same Nemo Outdoor system.
1. Add two phones to Nemo Outdoor: Device A and Device B
2. Open the Voice Call Settings for Device A by double-clicking the Voice Call item in
the Devices view.
126
3. Enter Device B phone number in the Phone number field.
4. Select the Enable end-to-end call option.

5. Select the Local device option and select Device B from the list. Click OK.
6. You can now start making voice calls from Device A to Device B.
6.8 Video quality monitoring

Telchemy's industry-leading VQmon® performance analysis technology is available as an
optional feature with Nemo Active Testing Application. It obtains a wealth of quality metrics
and analytics for video calls. It provides accurate QoE scores and critical diagnostics for every
mobile video session.
The technology works by assessing packet flows, looking for time-varying packet loss and jitter
and assessing the impact of such on media streams providing video MOS.
VQmon is an advanced VoIP perceptual quality estimation algorithm that incorporates support
for key international standards including ITU-T P.564, ITU-T G.107, ITU-T G.1020, ETSI TS
101 329-5 Annex E and IETF RFC 3611. VQmon is a "no-reference" algorithm that does not
use the original reference signal, and therefore is able to derive call quality scores using
typically less than one thousandth of the processing power needed by the P.862.x and P.863
approaches.
127
VQMon algorithm runs on NATA device. Each NATA device requires its own license. Only one
license is needed. E.g. Nemo Handy and Nemo Active Testing Application use the same
VQMon license. When NATA device is licensed for VQMon, users do not need to configure
any settings from Nemo Outdoor measurement properties. Quality metrics are automatically
reported for video calls. Please note that certain limitations apply depending on handset model
and type.
• Provides video MOS, VoLTE, ViLTE, VoWiFi and ViWiFi. Requires RTP packet
access
• Key parameters:
o Video quality MOS absolute
o Video quality MOS relative
o Video quality MOS absolute
o Video quality MOS relative
o Video quality average bitrate
o Video codec
o Video MOS testing
• Supported with handsets providing RTP packet information during IMS video calls.
Verified handsets:
o H1
o H2
• Requires NATA IMS Video Call Quality Option HA0900-01
POLQA voice quality testing is not supported with VoWiFi and ViWiFi measurements
at the moment.
6.9 Making video calls
Terminals verified by Keysight support video calls. However, video call testing with
Android-based devices is not supported.
Click the Video Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement dialog to access
the Video Call Properties dialog. These settings are needed for making video calls.
Note that the Qualcomm IMS IR.94 VoLTE option is required for video over LTE
testing.
128
Number defines the number where the video call will be made.
When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to
Nemo Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally
DTMF tones do not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone
lines (PSTN) user must define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo
Server manager application. If ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are
selected to be sent also caller id to Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically.
Note that this functionality requires Nemo Server version 2.5.0 or later.
Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice
quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.
Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio
sample is compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples
are of 8KHz sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than ten seconds in
testing) and sample length a maximum of 30 seconds.
Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are
saved. The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The
default threshold value is 5, which means that all samples are saved.
Note that the Script Settings view is activated only if you access this dialog through
the Script Editor.
129
Note that with voice quality measurements when calling Nemo Server, the delay time
between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10
seconds.
CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call.
Note that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA
mobile.
Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started
from the channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds.
Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as
the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter.
Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call
attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel,
the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the
Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least
10 seconds.
Note that video calls with the generic Qualcomm handler require some further settings
to be made prior to making the call. Go to Measurement Properties | Measurement,
and select the applicable video call method for the measurement from the drop-down
menu.
Select the method based on the list below, or try each Method separately and select the one
that works. The selected method is saved to the device configuration file.
• Method 1 - Samsung Z105
• Method 2 - Samsung Z107
• Method 3 - Samsung Z140, Samsung Z500, Samsung P920, Samsung Z560,
Samsung ZX20
• Method 4 - Samsung ZV10
• Method 5 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile
• Method 6 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile
• Method 7 - LG KU950, LG KF700
• Method 8 - Samsung U800 (always required to first make a video call using the
terminal keypad)
• Method 9 - Samsung G800
• Method 10 - Not used
To make video calls:

1. In the Measurement Properties, Configuration dialog, insert the phone number that
you wish to use in the test call in the Video Number field. Click OK.
2. Select Make Video Call from the Measurement Control menu in the Devices view
or run a script.
130
manually until the script is finished or you stop the script manually.
3. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Video Call. If you are
running a script, wait until the script is finished.
Video call testing is supported on any video call – capable terminal based on
Qualcomm chipset. However, the user must remember to select the correct method
from Measurement Properties | Measurement prior to making the call. The selected
method is saved to the device configuration file.
6.10 Data transfers

With mobiles supporting CS and PS data, you can make data transfers. In Nemo Outdoor, you
have several data protocol options for making data transfers.
The Nemo Outdoor Multi system enables multiple simultaneous data connections. Each data
transfer needs to be set up and configured individually.
Multiple concurrent data transfers can be made manually or with scripts. To make multiple
concurrent data transfers manually, go in online mode and activate a packet session. Then
select Start New Data Transfer and the desired protocol.
decoding function (Measurement Properties - Measurement) prior to performing data
measurements. Select Full logging or Partial logging in the IP packet monitor field.
131
A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement, and this file needs to
accompany the measurement file under the same folder when viewing and decoding
packet capture information in packet decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.
6.10.1 Configuring the data connection
Before you can start making data transfers you need to define the actual connection
that is used for the transfer. The setup is different for CS and PS data transfers.
If you are making CS data transfers, see chapter Data Call Properties. If you are making PS
data transfers, see chapter Packet Session Settings.
6.10.1.1 Data Call Properties dialog
Data Call properties are needed to establish the circuit-switched data connection. Open the
Data Call Properties dialog by double-clicking the Circuit-Switched Data Call item in the
Devices view.
There are separate views for GSM, UMTS, and CDMA. The parameters are the same. The
UMTS and CDMA views just have fewer parameters.
A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.
Number defines the number of the server.

Username refers to the server username.
Password refers to the server password.
Transparent mode defines whether transparent or non-transparent mode is used in the CS
data call.
Compression defines if no compression or v.42bis compression is used.
Modem type refers to the modem type that the server is using. The alternatives are Analog
(v.34) and ISDN (v.110 and v.120).
132
Timeslots (UL/DL) defines the number of timeslots for each direction.

Coding defines the coding scheme used in the air interface.
Enable automatic link adaptation option allows you to disable and enable Automatic Link
Adaptation (ALA). The ALA technology controls power levels and automatically selects the
best channel coding.
6.10.1.2 Packet session settings
Packet session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. Double-
click the Packet Session item in the Devices view to access the Packet Session Settings
dialog.
All the parameters in this dialog are operator specific. You must select the correct parameters
to make the packet transfer function. Contact the operator of the network that you are
measuring.
133
6.10.1.3 iPerf configuration
With iPerf testing it is recommended to use Nemo Server at all times, as the original
iPerf service is slightly modified. Receive direction was added so that only minimum
amount of data is sent to uplink. However, standard iPerf server can be used for
performing only UL or UL+DL data transfers. DL only data transfer mode requires
Nemo Server.
Version defines which version of iPerf is used.

Host name is the IP address used in Nemo Server.
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals,
each connection must have its own IP address.
Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal,
the same IP address can be used.
Note that Firewall should be turned off.
Host port refers to the port used by Nemo Server. For TCP and UDP protocols, the default port
is 5001.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time,
connection attempt will fail.
134
Listen port refers to the port used by the client. For TCP and UDP protocols, the default port is
6015.
When using a VPN connection, define the NATA tunnel address to bind NATA to the correct
interface. This setting is needed only with NATA devices. Manual interface binding allows
using a VPN connection for data testing, for example for iPerf UDP data transfers.
Select either TCP or UDP for Transport protocol.
Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data.
Transfer timeout determines the maximum waiting time after data connection. If the transfer
attempt timeout value is exceeded before data connection, the data connection attempt will be
stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of Transfer timeout values is
from 0 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.
Number of threads defines the number of parallel Iperf data transfers.
TCP window size defines the size of the receive window during TCP/IP transmission. If it is too
small, it can decrease the maximum data throughput, and if it is too high it can increase the
retransmission round-trip time (RTT). To be able to avoid decrease of data throughput, the
window size should be at least the maximum throughput multiplied by RTT. For example, with
HSDPA with category 8 the maximum throughput is about 7.3 Mbit/s and RTT is about 100
ms. To avoid reduction of the throughput the TCP window size should be set at least to 7.3
Mbit/s * 0.1 s = 730 kbit = 91.25 kB. Downlink testing (these values are indicative only):
Max. throughput ~RTT (ms) TCP window size TCP window size (kB)
(kbit)
64 kbps (GPRS/ 600 38.4 4.8
EDGE)
128 kbps (GPRS/ 600 76.8 9.6
EDGE)
256 kbps (GPRS/ 600 153.6 19.2
EDGE)
384kbps (Rel. 99) 200 76.8 9.6
HSDPA 1.8Mbps 100 180 22.5
UE category 3 & 4
HSDPA 3.6Mbps 100 360 45
UE category 5 & 6
HSDPA 7.3Mbps 100 730 91.25
UE category 7 & 8
HSDPA 10.2Mbps 100 1020 127.5
UE category 9
HSDPA 14.4Mbps 100 1440 180
UE category 9
Table 1. TCP window size.
TCP/UDP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a
validation from the receiver. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes.
135
UDP bandwidth defines how much data is attempted to be transmitted. Since UDP does not
guarantee successful data transmission, it is not limited by maximum throughput of the lower
layers. If higher data transmission rate is used, the packet error rate (PER) increases. For
example, if lower layers are capable of transmitting 100kbit/s and UDP bandwidth is configured
to 400kbit/s, there should be a 75% packet error rate (only every fourth packet has been able
to transmit successfully). Naturally UDP bandwidth should not be configured too small since it
limits the maximum throughput that is not normally desired.
UDP datagram size defines the size of the UDP packet in bytes. It should be smaller than the
maximum packet size of the lower layers to be able to avoid packet fragmentation in the lower
layers. Packet fragmentation has a huge negative impact to the achieved data throughput and
it should be avoided. On the other hand, if too small UDP packet size is used the portion of the
UDP and IP header increases which decreases the amount of transmitted user data with the
result of smaller data throughput. Normally good maximum value for UDP datagram is a little
bit less than maximum Ethernet packet size which is 1,500 bytes. A good default value for the
UDP datagram size is 1,460 bytes.
Limit transfer by
• duration defines the length of the data transfer in seconds.
• data size defines the length of the total data transfer in kilobytes; that is, the transfer
finishes when the defined amount of data has been transferred. The size of the
individual data packages is defined in the Packet Size field.
Note that if you have chosen Transfer data size from the Packet Transfer Properties
dialog, the Transfer duration option will be disabled. This is because when the
Transfer data size option is used, the transmission will end after a certain amount of
data has been transferred. It is not limited by time.
Next, click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. Click the PDP Context
Properties button.
6.10.2 Configuring the FTP protocol

Nemo Outdoor has an integrated FTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer rates
between Nemo Outdoor and the FTP server. The server can be any standard FTP server.
Current data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The FTP
module supports firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer is
initialized, the server opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through
this connection. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection
requests, and in that case the data transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always
opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection.
If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the
computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor.
To set up data measurements using FTP:

1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to configure the
measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see
Measurement Properties – Measurement)
136
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see
Packet session settings).
4. Define FTP transfer-related settings in the FTP Settings dialog.
5. Create a script (optional) (see IP diagnostics
6. Qualcomm-based devices can be configured to listen an IP port in case the device
supports sending diagnostic data via LAN.
In the Device Configuration dialog, select the New URL option as Trace Port.
In the Trace Port URL dialog, provide the transfer protocol, IP address and port number in the
following format: [protocol]://[IP address]:[port number]. For example, udp://192.168.0.1:8888.
Protocol is udp:// or tcp:// depending on which protocol should be used.
IP address is the address which Nemo Outdoor should be listening to.
Port number is the port which Nemo Outdoor should be listening to.
137
7. Making script files).

8. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer.
6.10.2.1 FTP Settings dialog
Open the FTP/SFTP Settings dialog by double-clicking the FTP item in the Devices view.
Transfer protocol defines whether FTP or SFTP is used.
Host address is the IP address of the SFTP server used. You can also choose to use IPv6
tunneling over an IPv4 connection.
138
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals
without NATA, each connection must have its own IP address.
computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor.
Host port refers to the port used by the SFTP server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SFTP server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SFTP server.
Timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to
be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt
will fail.
With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not
block the connection
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a
transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined
time, transfer will fail.
Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.
Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during
one SFTP session.
Number of threads defines the number of threads in multithreaded SFTP transfer.
Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the SFTP server. If you are
receiving data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file.
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set
to send for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection.
Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.
Also note that if there are several testing units using the same SFTP server, we
recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt,
filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are
trying to write in the same file.
Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving
data, this is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location
for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties – Paths dialog.
Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size.
This functionality is available with SFTP upload testing. The file is named with following format
<IMEI>_<file size in kB>.bin.
Select the Write local file to disk option to save the downloaded file on disk.
139
to receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection.
Diskless transfer allows you to download dynamic data from Nemo Server. Also define Nemo
Server connection settings in the HTTPS Options dialog.
Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are
Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.
Address refers to the address of the proxy.
Port refers to the port used by the proxy.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.
6.10.3 Configuring the SFTP protocol

Nemo Outdoor has an integrated SFTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer
rates between Nemo Outdoor and the SFTP server. The server can be any standard SFTP
server. Current data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The
SFTP module supports firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer
is initialized, the server opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred
through this connection. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection
requests, and in that case the data transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always
opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection.
To set up data measurements using SFTP:

1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
4. Define SFTP transfer-related settings in the SFTP Settings dialog.
140

8. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer
141
6.10.3.1 SFTP Settings dialog

Open the FTP Settings dialog by double-clicking the FTP/SFTP item in the Devices view.
Transfer protocol defines whether FTP or SFTP is used.
Host address is the IP address of the SFTP server used. You can also choose to use IPv6
142
without NATA, each connection must have its own IP address.
Host port refers to the port used by the SFTP server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SFTP server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SFTP server.
Timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to
be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt
will fail.
With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not
block the connection
Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during
one SFTP session.
Number of threads defines the number of threads in multithreaded SFTP transfer.
Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the SFTP server. If you are
to send for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection.
Also note that if there are several testing units using the same SFTP server, we
recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt,
filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are
trying to write in the same file.
Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size.
This functionality is available with SFTP upload testing. The file is named with following format
143
6.10.4 Configuring the HTTP(S) protocol

The HTTP(S) testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through
the HTTP(S) protocol. The HTTP(S) protocol is used in web browsing. In HTTP(S) testing, the
user selects one file that will be downloaded or uploaded through the HTTP(S) protocol and
this data transfer is measured.
To set up data measurements using HTTP(S):

4. Define HTTP transfer-related settings in the HTTP(S) Transfer Properties dialog.
144

6.10.4.1 HTTP(S) Transfer Properties dialog
Open the HTTP Settings dialog by double-clicking the HTTP item in the Devices view. The
same dialog is used for defining HTTPS transfer properties.
145
In the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog, you can define the required data transfer settings.
URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded when data is received. For
example, http://www.yourcompany.com/testfile.htm. Only one file will be downloaded at a time.
If you are sending HTTP data, URL defines the destination. To define a port for the transfer,
type the port number after the URL, for example, http://www.yourcompany.com:85.
without NATA, you must define a different URL from different servers for each of
them.
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, you
can use the same URL for all of them.
146
Direction defines whether the HTTP file is sent or received. For sending, there are two options:
POST and PUT.
Timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time,
transfer will fail.
Select the Enable multipart option to change the multi-threaded transfer mode. Enabling this
option will make each transfer thread to download different part of the same file, instead of
downloading the same file once by each thread. The option is available only with NATA
devices.
Number of threads enables the multi-threaded file transfer to ensure maximum throughput. By
enabling this feature the same file will be transferred multiple times using simultaneous
transfer threads. Recommended transfer thread count for maximum throughput is 4-8. To
make consecutive transfers, create a script with several HTTP transfers.
Local File defines the output file and location for HTTP testing. The default location for these
files is defined in the User Interface Properties – Paths dialog.
Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This
functionality is available with HTTP upload testing. The file is named with following format
User agent allows you to define the user agent string used for the HTTP/HTTPS transfer. It is
by default Nemo Outdoor, but it is possible to define another user agent. Please see the
http://user-agents.my-addr.com/user_agent_request/user_agent_examples-and-
user_agent_types.php for further details about user agents.
Select the appropriate Authentication Scheme and define the username and password for the
authentication.
Proxy Type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements.
Select the Use SSL encryption option to transfer the files over a HTTPS connection.
147
6.10.5 Configuring the (HTTP) browsing protocol

The HTTP Browser testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred
through the HTTP Browsing protocol. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. In HTTP
testing, the user selects one URL address that will be downloaded through the HTTP protocol
and this data transfer is measured.
If you are experiencing problems with HTTP browsing testing, such as, the page
downloading time is increased, disable the following LAN settings: Automatically
detect settings and Proxy server.
To set up data measurements using HTTP browsing protocol:

Measurement Properties – Measurement).
4. Define HTTP browsing-related settings in the Browser Transfer Properties dialog.
148

149
6.10.5.1 Browser Transfer Properties dialog

Open the Browser Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the Browsing item in the
Devices view.
URL defines the IP address of the test page that will be downloaded. For example,
http://www.yourcompany.com/testbrowser.htm. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling
over an IPv4 connection.
time, the transfer will fail.
Select or clear the Display browser window option to display/hide the browser window during
the data transfer.
If Decode content information is selected, information about the images, texts and links are
written to measurement file including the number of content elements and size information.
In the Additional headers field you can type a custom HTTP header, for example, for
identifying the user agent.
The downloaded page can be seen during the measurement and the total time to download
the whole page is written to the measurement file. The cache is disabled by default. PPP and
RLC layer data throughputs are logged during the browser testing. The average PPP and RLC
data throughputs are also available. Average results are calculated from the time PDP context
was active (PAC- PAD). The connection setup time and the download time can be seen in
Nemo Outdoor or calculated with Nemo Analyze
For multi browser testing with single computer it is recommended that Nemo Server
be used for multiple simultaneous data connections, e.g. for benchmarking purposes
as each connection must have its own IP address (does not apply when NATA is
used).
150
6.10.6 Configuring the POP3 protocol

POP3, SMTP, and IMAP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor
and to monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 and IMAP protocols are used for
receiving and SMTP protocol for sending emails.
To set up data measurements using POP3:

4. Define POP3 Server settings in the E-Mail Settings – POP3 dialog. Also define the
test e-mails that are used in the measurement.
151

6.10.6.1 E-Mail Settings – POP3 dialog
Open the E-Mail Settings (POP3) dialog by double-clicking the POP3 item in the Devices
view.
POP3 Server Settings define settings for the POP3 server used in the measurements.
Server name defines a name or an IP address for the POP3 server. You can also choose to
use IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection.
152
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals,
each connection must have its own IP address.
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used.
Port refers to the port used by the POP3 server.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the POP3 server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the POP3 server.
Select the Use SSL encryption option to apply SSL encryption to the test email.
Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements.
POP3 receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo
Outdoor.
Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages
received from the e-mail server.
Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. This will
save disk space.
The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog.
153
6.10.7 Configuring the SMTP protocol

To set up data measurements using SMTP:

4. Define SMTP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings – SMTP dialog. Also define the
test e-mails that are used in the measurement.
154

6.10.7.1 E-Mail Settings – SMTP dialog
Open the E-Mail Settings (SMTP) dialog by double-clicking the SMTP item in the Devices
view.
SMTP Server Settings define settings for the SMTP server used in the measurements.
Server name defines a name or an IP address for the SMTP server. You can also choose to
155
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must
have its own IP address.
Note that some operators prevent accessing SMTP services other than their own.
Therefore, it is not possible to test SMTP against the Nemo server with those
operators' SIM cards.
Port refers to the port used by the SMTP server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SMTP server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SMTP server.
Messages to be sent defines the test messages used in the SMTP test. Click the Edit button
to open the E-Mail Editor where you can type the test message and attach files to the
message.
156
6.10.7.2 E-Mail Editor dialog

Use the E-Mail Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test
messages and save messages for later use. E-mail messages up to 100.000 characters or
1MB are supported.
New E-Mail Message button saves the current changes and opens an empty E-Mail Editor.
Open E-Mail Message button opens an Open dialog where you can open premade e-mail
messages.
Save E-Mail Message button saves the current e-mail message for later use.
Save As button saves the current e-mail message with a different name for later use.
Save Attachments button saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location.
Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test e-mail.
Add button opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message.
Remove button removes the selected attachment from the test message.
157
6.10.7.3 HTTP(S) Transfer Properties dialog

Open the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the HTTP item in the Devices
view. The same dialog is used for defining HTTPS transfer properties.
In the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog, you can define the required data transfer settings.
Proxy Type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements.
Select the appropriate Authentication Scheme and define the username and password for the
authentication.
Direction defines whether the HTTP file is sent or received. For sending, there are two options:
POST and PUT.
158
Number of threads enables all the threads to be started simultaneously with the same time
stamp. The number of threads can be defined by the user. Each thread transfers the entire file.
Select the Enable multipart transfer option to activate multipart transfer for HTTP. The option
is available only with NATA devices.
URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded when data is received. For
example, http://www.yourcompany.com/testfile.htm. Only one file will be downloaded at a time.
If you are sending HTTP data, URL defines the destination. To define a port for the transfer,
type the port number after the URL, for example, http://www.yourcompany.com:85.
without NATA, you must define a different URL from different servers for each of
them.
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, you
can use the same URL for all of them.
To make consecutive transfers, create a script with several HTTP transfers.

Local File defines the output file and location for HTTP testing. The default location for these
files is defined in the User Interface Properties – Paths dialog.
Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This
functionality is available with HTTP upload testing. The file is named with following format
User agent allows you to define the user agent string used for the HTTP/HTTPS transfer. It is
by default Nemo Outdoor, but it is possible to define another user agent. Please see the
http://user-agents.my-addr.com/user_agent_request/user_agent_examples-and-
user_agent_types.php for further details about user agents.
Select the Use SSL encryption option to transfer the files over a HTTPS connection.
6.10.8 Configuring the IMAP protocol

159
To set up data measurements using IMAP:

Measurement Properties – Measurement).
4. Define IMAP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings – IMAP dialog. Also define the test
e-mails that are used in the measurement.
160

6.10.8.1 E-Mail Settings – IMAP dialog

Open the E-Mail Settings (IMAP) dialog by double-clicking the IMAP item in the Devices view.
IMAP server settings define settings for the IMAP server used in the measurements.
Server name defines a name or an IP address for the server. You can also choose to use IPv6
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must
have its own IP address.
Port refers to the port used by the server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the server.
161
IMAP receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo
Outdoor.
Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages
received from the e-mail server.
Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. This will
save disk space.
The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog.
6.10.9 Configuring the streaming protocol
Note that to make video streaming quality measurements, Microsoft Network Monitor
must be installed and IP packet monitoring must be enabled. Refer to chapter IP
packet monitoring for more information.
The Streaming testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through
the streaming protocol. The streaming protocol is used, for example, in video streaming. In the
streaming testing, the user selects one file that will be downloaded through the streaming
protocol and this data transfer is measured.
In order to make streaming measurements with Nemo Outdoor version 7.20 onwards, you
need to have VLC player v. 2.1.0 or newer installed. With Nemo Outdoor versions 6.40 - 7.10,
you need to have VLC player v. 2.0.6 or newer (32-bit) installed on the computer. You can
download VLC from http://www.videolan.org/vlc.
With Nemo Outdoor 6.2 and older versions, you need to have RealPlayer version 11 installed
on the computer. You can download RealPlayer 11 from http://www.real.com.
To set up data measurements using streaming:
162
1. Install VLC.
2. Install Microsoft Network Monitor.
measurement mobile.
4. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties – Measurement
dialog. Also define the test files that are used in the measurement.
6. Define Streaming properties (see Streaming Properties).
163

6.10.9.1 Streaming Properties dialog

Open the Streaming Properties dialog by double-clicking the Streaming item in the Devices
view.
Note that if the Streaming item is not available in the Devices view, VLC is not
installed on the computer. You can download a free player from
http://www.videolan.org/vlc.
URL defines the IP address (http or rtsp) of the video file that will be streamed. For example,
rtsp://yourcompany.com/testfile.rm or videos from YouTube (m.youtube.com/video). Only one
file will be downloaded at a time. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections,
you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. To make consecutive
downloads, create a script with several streaming sessions. You can also choose to use IPv6
Rebuffering timeout defines the maximum allowed buffering duration during video playback.
164
Select the Display video stream option if you would like to view the test clip during the
streaming.
6.10.10 Configuring the trace route protocol

By conducting trace route testing functionality, you can trace the servers pinged along the way
to the target server.
Ping trace route testing can be used to help troubleshooting network or Internet connections.
The ping utility tests responsiveness between two hosts, etc. With ping trace route testing it is
also possible to check responsiveness and trace the path of the packet from one host to
another. In case the network does not respond to ping or trace route requests with trace route
testing, it is possible to show the location right before the host that is not responding.
To set up data measurements using the trace route protocol:

4. See below how to define Trace Route properties.
165

6.10.10.1 Trace Route Properties dialog

Open the Trace Route Properties dialog by double-clicking the Trace Route item in the
Devices view.
166
The Remote host field defines the IP address or URL of the target server of the trace route
measurement, for example, www.keysight.com. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP
server. Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping. You can also choose to
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections with different terminals,
each connection must be given its own, separate IP address!
the same IP address can be used!
Transfer timeout determines the maximum timeout seconds since the beginning of the
operation.
HOP timeout defines the maximum amount of time to wait for an individual hop to complete.
HOP limit defines the maximum number of servers to be pinged along the way to the target
server.
By selecting the Resolve host names item, the names of the pinged servers will be reported by
Nemo Outdoor.
6.10.11 Making data transfers

After you have configured the data connection and selected and configured the data protocol,
you can start making the data transfers.
Firewall must be deactivated when making data transfers.
To make data transfers:

1. Activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.
167
manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Stop
Scripts button.
2. To make manual data transfer, click the Measurement control button in the Devices
view and select Start New Data Transfer followed by the appropriate data transfer
command.
3. To end the data transfer, click the Measurement control button in the Devices view
and select the appropriate data transfer stop command.
6.11 Streaming video quality testing

Streaming video quality testing allows you to monitor how streaming video is transferred in the
network. Data streaming can be made manually and with scripts. Nemo Outdoor supports
PEVQ-S streaming video quality testing which can be done either on the PC or on a device
that has Nemo Active Testing Application installed. A video preview can be seen during the
measurement in Nemo Outdoor.
Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Invex support multiple video streaming PEVQ-S connections. With
Nemo Outdoor up to eight devices, and with Nemo Invex up to six devices can be used
simultaneously to test streaming video quality in on-device mode, when PEVQ-S option is
enabled in Nemo Active Testing Application.
If a test handset has Nemo Active Testing Application without PEVQ-S option
installed, it prevents PEVQ-S testing as NATA test handsets are always online. In
such case, to run multiple PEVQ-S connections simultaneously, a dedicated PC is
required with only one NATA test handset connected to the PC.
6.11.1 NATA PEVQ-S license

Separate license exists for NATA-based PEVQ-S streaming analysis per test handset. In case
PEVQ-S license option is in NATA it is possible to perform the PEVQ-S streaming with NATA
even when Nemo Outdoor PEVQ-S license (PC/ Windows-based) is not enabled. Creating
PEVQ-S streaming scripts is always possible. In case both NATA and Nemo Outdoor includes
license for PEVQ-S testing, test algorithm is run on the smartphone using NATA. For test
occasions running the PEVQ-S algorithm on PC test handset should be added to Nemo
Outdoor without NATA port enabled.
Please note that if the PEVQ-S license for Nemo Active Testing Application is also enabled the
video resolution forcing is not supported. In such a case the device must be added to Nemo
Outdoor without NATA port defined. Before starting video streaming quality measurements,
select the video quality algorithm used, PEVQ-S, from the Device Configuration –
Voice/Video quality page.
168
In order to be able to make streaming video quality measurements using PEVQ-S, you will
need to install WinPCAP v. 4.1.3 on the computer and to define PEVQ-S settings in the PEVQ-
S dialog. WinPCAP is available in the Nemo product package or you can download it from the
product websites.
Making streaming video quality measurements with PEVQ-S:

1. Check that WinPCAP v. 4.1.3 is installed on the computer.
2. Select the PEVQ-S option from the Device Configuration – Voice/video quality page.
3. Define the PEVQ-S settings in the PEVQ-S Properties dialog.
4. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button. From the Measurement
control menu in the Devices view, select Start New Data Transfer to start the data
transfer with the selected test devices.
5. From the Measurement control menu in the Devices view, select Stop Data
Transfer to end the data transfer or wait until the entire video clip has been streamed.
169
6.11.2 PEVQ-S Properties dialog

When making video streaming quality measurements with the PEVQ-S algorithm, you need to
define some settings in the PEVQ-S Properties dialog.
Video offers a selection of videos that can be used in the testing. Only these preloaded videos
can be used for testing. The videos are available in folder Nemo Tools\Video Files.
Video quality defines the video resolution.
Select or clear the Display video stream option to display/hide the video stream window during
the data transfer.
6.12 Application testing

Nemo Outdoor offers several application testing features. If you have purchased the Line and
Snapchat testing licenses, please contact Nemo Customer Support for further details.
6.12.1 Screencasting and touchscreen simulation

The screencasting and touchscreen simulation offer an automated way to test almost any
application running on the Android smartphone. With screencasting it is possible to test, for
example video calls, Netflix, Googleplay, WhatsApp messages, and voice calls.
The screen of the handset can be seen in Nemo Outdoor in real time. The user can send
virtual touch commands to the device based on user interaction with the screencasting view.
These sequences of touch commands and physical button commands are recorded to
separate screencast macro files that can be saved and reused.
The functionality works with handsets locally connected to the Nemo Outdoor PC, as well as
with handsets connected to Nemo Invex chassis, with and without handset isolation modules
(HIM/ SHIM).
Recording a screencasting macro file is allowed for one device at a time.
170
In addition to touchscreen simulation, the new screencasting features can be used, for
example, to change the handset settings and to perform OTA updates.
To open the screencasting view, click the Measurement settings button in the Devices view
and select Screencast.
171
The view on the left shows the device screen in real time. The buttons at the bottom of the
view simulate the device’s Back, Home, and Power buttons.
The Screencast macro view on the right is used to record touchscreen simulations. Click the
Record macro button to start recording.
Use your mouse to control the device screen. The selected commands appear on the list.
Stop the macro recording from the Stop macro button and save the macro. The macro file
(.nscx) will be saved in the Scripts folder.
To load a macro file, click the Load macro button and select a file in the Screencast Macro
File Selection dialog. The same macro file can be used with several devices.
172
Macro files can be activated with script files using the Send Screencast Macro script
command.
173
6.12.2 Facebook testing

In order to be able to test the Facebook application, you will need to set up a Facebook page
and create a Facebook app. First, set up a Facebook developer account and create an app.
Note that NATA is required to perform Facebook testing.
1. Go to Facebook and create a new Facebook account.
2. After you have created an account, go to https://developers.facebook.com/ and create a

developer account. Click on Get Started.
3. After you have created and verified your developer account, click on Create First App or
go to My Apps - Create App if you have created apps before.
174
4. In the Select an app type dialog, select None and click Continue.
175
5. In the Create a New App ID dialog, enter a name for your app and the app contact email.
Finally click Create App.
6. Next, you need to create a Facebook page. Log in to Facebook with your regular account
and select Create - Page.
176
7. Define a name and category for your page and click Create Page. You can skip the steps
of adding a profile and cover photo and just click Save.
177
8. Your new page is created. Copy the page ID (a string of numbers) from the URL of the
page. This ID is entered in the Page ID field in Nemo Outdoor Facebook Configuration
dialog.
9. Return to the Facebook for Developers site (https://developers.facebook.com/) and log in

with your developer account. Select More – Tools.
178
10. Select Graph API Explorer.
11. In the Graph API Explorer, you will see the Access Token settings on the right. Select
your app in the Facebook App field.
12. Select Get Page Access Token from the User or Page drop-down menu. Allow
Facebook to use cookies and similar technologies placed on other apps and websites.
179
13. Log in to Facebook and provide access to the page you created for this purpose. Click
Next.
180
14. Check that both options are selected and click Done and OK. Facebook will link the app
to the page.
181
15. Return to the Graph API Explorer view. Check that your app is still selected in the
Facebook App field and that your Facebook page is selected in the User or Page field.
16. In the Add a Permission menu, expand the Events Groups Pages item and select the
following permissions:
• pages_read_engagement
• pages_manage_metadata
• pages_read_user_content
• pages_manage_ads
• pages_manage_posts
• pages_manage_engagement
• public_profile
17. After selecting the permissions, check that Page (instead of User Token) is still selected.
Finally click the Generate Access Token button.
When new permissions are added, the permissions appear with green text. Wait until
all permissions turn grey.
182
18. Click the icon in the Access Token field. In the Access Token Info dialog, click the
Open in Access Token Tool button.
19. In the Access Token Debugger view, click the Extend Access Token button. Check
that Type is Page. If the Type is User, the configuration has failed, and you must go back
to step 12. Enter your FB password if asked. Click Extend Access Token to generate the
extended access token ID.
183
20. The extended token ID (valid for two months) appears at the bottom of the view. Copy and
paste this in the Nemo Outdoor Facebook Configuration dialog, Page access token field.
6.12.2.1 Renewing the access token

The Facebook access token needs to be renewed every two months.
1. Log in to the Facebook for Developers site (https://developers.facebook.com/) with your
developer account.
2. Select More – Tools.
3. Select Graph API Explorer.
184
4. In the Graph API Explorer, you will see the Access Token settings on the right.
5. Select your app in the Facebook App field.
6. In the User or Page field, select your Facebook page.

7. Click the icon in the Access Token field to open the Access Token Info view.
8. In the Access Token Info view, check that the Page ID matches the page ID of the page
for which you are renewing the token. You can find the current page ID from the Nemo
Outdoor Facebook Configuration dialog. If the page ID does not match, check that you
have selected the correct page in the User or Page field and the correct application in the
Facebook App field.
185
9. Click the Open in Access Token Tool button.

10. In the Access Token Debugger view, click the Extend Access Token button. Enter your
FB password if asked.
11. The extended token ID (valid for two months) appears at the bottom of the view. Copy and
paste this in the Nemo Outdoor Facebook Configuration dialog, Page access token field.
186
6.12.2.2 Configure Nemo Outdoor for Facebook testing

To start running Facebook tests, you will need to define some Facebook settings in the
Facebook Configuration dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Facebook item in the
Devices view.
Please note that if the Facebook item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo
Outdoor license does not support Facebook testing.
Page access token and Page ID items are explained in the previous chapter.
When performing Facebook testing with multiple devices, use the same Facebook
account on all of them. With Nemo Invex II, use different UICs for the data
connections and then you can use individual Facebook accounts for each of them.
You can define an image or video that will be uploaded on the wall of your Facebook profile.
Comment is text that will either be posted as a status update (without a photo) or as a caption
for a photo.
Limit for feed retrieval defines how many items or from how many days the items will be
retrieved from the wall when the user executes the Get Wall Feed command.
187
After defining Facebook settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click
the Measurement control button and select one of the Facebook-related commands. The
following information is logged for each command: operation type, success/failure, time
elapsed, and amount of data received/sent.
• Get Facebook wall feed will download the wall feed from your page’s Facebook
account. The amount of data downloaded is defined by the Limit for feed retrieval
setting in the Facebook Configuration dialog.
• Post Facebook status update will upload the text typed in the Comment field and post
it on the wall of your Facebook page.
• Post Facebook image will upload the photo selected in the Facebook Configuration
dialog and the text typed in the Comment field as caption on the wall of your Facebook
page.
• Post Facebook video will upload the video selected in the Facebook Configuration
dialog and the text typed in the Comment field as caption on the wall of your Facebook
page.
Please note that the maximum file size and duration for a Facebook video is 10 GB/4
h.
Please note that Facebook has its own limits for the number of account actions per
day. Check the Facebook Help Center for current information about the limits. If you
see an error message, it means the Facebook limit has been reached. It is not a
permanent error, so the feed will continue to work, and once the limit is reset at the
Facebook end (daily), new posts will be posted again automatically.
Currently each app is given an allotment of 200 API calls per user in any given 60-
minute window. Please note that Facebook can change this limit. Please see more
details from: https://developers.facebook.com/docs/graph-api/advanced/rate-limiting.
Custom Facebook test applications offer more flexibilities to test Facebook with drive
test tools as some of the limits seen with normal Facebook apps do not apply, such as
number of allowed postings per hour. Please see the following link for further
information: https://developers.facebook.com/docs/apps. To create your own
Facebook test application, please login to
https://developers.facebook.com/docs/apps/register
If Facebook benchmarking is done using a commercial laptop, the same user account
settings must be used with all test devices.
188
6.12.3 Twitter testing

In order to be able to test the Twitter application, you will need to set up a Twitter account.
To start running Twitter tests, you will need to define some settings in the Twitter
Configuration dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Twitter item in the Devices
view.
Please note that if the Twitter item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo
Outdoor license does not support Twitter testing.
If you want to follow the Twitter feed of a specific user or a hashtag, type in the
username/hashtag in the @User/#Feed field without the @ or # symbols.
189
User access token and User access token secret are required for Twitter testing. Click the Get
Access Token button. You will be redirected to the Twitter login page.
Enter your account information and select the Remember me option. Click Sign In. You will
return to Nemo Outdoor and the access token and access token secret will appear in the field.
Application access token and Application access token secret fields are required only if you
have your own application for accessing Twitter. Otherwise you can leave these fields empty.
You can define an Image that will be uploaded to your Twitter feed.
Comment is text that will be posted as a tweet.
Limit for feed retrieval defines how many items or from how many days the items will be
retrieved from the feed when the user executes the Get Feed command.
Please note that Twitter has its own limits for the number of account actions per day.
Check the Twitter Help Center for current information about the limits.
190
After defining Twitter settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Twitter and then one of
the Twitter-related commands.
Get User Feed will download your own Twitter feed.

Load Profile will download the Twitter feed from the selected user (defined in the Twitter
Configuration dialog, @User / #Feed field).
Follow Feed will download the feed from the selected Twitter hashtag. The amount of data
downloaded is defined by the Limit for feed retrieval setting in the Twitter Configuration dialog.
Post Feed will upload the text typed in the Twitter Configuration dialog, Comment field and
post it on your Twitter feed.
Post Image will upload the image selected in the Twitter Configuration dialog on your Twitter
feed.
You can follow Twitter-related statistics in a grid.
191
6.12.4 WhatsApp testing

With Nemo Outdoor you can test WhatsApp messaging and WhatsApp voice and video calls.
With Nemo Intelligent Device Interface (NIDI), you can also test WhatsApp voice quality
(POLQA). In order to test the WhatsApp application, you will need a device with NATA and the
WhatsApp testing license option.
To start running WhatsApp tests, install the WhatsApp application from Google Play on your
test device and create a WhatsApp account. Please follow the installation steps in the
WhatsApp application.
You must be able to receive phone calls and SMS to the phone number you are trying
to verify and you must have a working Internet connection through mobile data or
WiFi.
Note that the WhatsApp account is subscription (SIM card) specific so have the phone
number available when creating the WhatsApp account. Once the WhatsApp account
is created, you must not change the SIM card. If the SIM card is changed, you must
create a new account in WhatsApp.
Once the WhatsApp application is installed and activated, start Nemo Outdoor and start the
test devices.
Please note that the WhatsApp item is not visible in the Devices view until you switch
to online mode in Nemo Outdoor.
You can test WhatsApp manually or with scripts. If you use a script, make sure to select the
Synchronize script repeats option from User Interface Properties.
192
6.12.4.1 Testing WhatsApp voice calls manually

1. Add two WhatsApp-capable devices to Nemo Outdoor. One device is set up as the
originating party and the other as the receiving party.
2. First define the call settings for the receiving party. Select the device receiving calls
and double-click the WhatsApp item in the Devices view.
193
3. In the WhatsApp Settings dialog, define the incoming call settings.
4. After defining the incoming call settings, return to the Devices view. Select the
originating device and double-click the WhatsApp item.
194
5. In the WhatsApp Settings dialog, define the outgoing call settings. Make sure the call
duration is the same for the outgoing and incoming call. Click OK.
6. After defining the settings, return to the Devices view. Select the device receiving calls
and click the Measurement Control button. Select Wait incoming WhatsApp call.
195
7. Next, select the device originating calls and click the Measurement Control button.
Select Start WhatsApp call.
8. You can follow WhatsApp-related statistics in a grid.
196
6.12.4.2 Testing WhatsApp video calls manually

and double-click the WhatsApp item in the Devices view.
197
3. In the WhatsApp Settings dialog, define the incoming call settings on the Incoming
VoIP Call page.
originating device and double-click the WhatsApp item.
198
5. In WhatsApp Settings – Outgoing Video Call page, define the outgoing video call
settings. Make sure the call duration is the same for the outgoing and incoming call.
Click OK.
and click the Measurement Control button. Select Wait incoming WhatsApp call.
199
Select Start WhatsApp Video Call.
6.12.4.3 Testing WhatsApp messaging manually

2. Select the device sending messages and double-click the WhatsApp item in the
Devices view.
200
3. In the WhatsApp Settings – Data Transfer dialog, define the data transfer settings.
You can send either text or an image file. Also define the number of the receiving end.
Note that the receiving end also needs to have a WhatsApp account.
201
4. After defining the settings, return to the Devices view. Select the device sending the
WhatsApp messages and click the Measurement Control button. Select Start New
Data Transfer –WhatsApp, Send Message or Start New Data Transfer –
WhatsApp, Send Image.
5. You can follow WhatsApp-related statistics in a grid.
202
6.12.5 BiP testing

With Nemo Outdoor you can test BiP messaging and BiP voice and video calls. In order to test
the BiP application, you will need a device with NATA and the BiP testing license option.
To start running BiP tests, install the BiP application from Google Play on your test device and
create a BiP account. Please follow the installation steps in the BiP application.
WiFi.
Note that the BiP account is subscription (SIM card) specific so have the phone
number available when creating the account. Once the account is created, you must
not change the SIM card. If the SIM card is changed, you must create a new account
in BiP.
Once the BiP application is installed and activated, start Nemo Outdoor and start the test
devices.
Please note that the BiP item is not visible in the Devices view until you switch to
online mode in Nemo Outdoor.
You can test BiP manually or with scripts. If you use a script, make sure to select the
6.12.5.1 Testing BiP voice calls manually

1. Add two BiP-capable devices to Nemo Outdoor. One device is set up as the
and double-click the BiP item in the Devices view.
203
3. In BiP Settings – Incoming VoIP Call, define the incoming call settings.
originating device and double-click the BiP item.
204
5. In BiP Settings – Outgoing Call, define the outgoing call settings. Make sure the call
and click the Measurement Control button. Select Wait Incoming BiP call.
205
Select Start BiP Call.
8. You can follow BiP-related statistics in a grid.
6.12.5.2 Testing BiP video calls manually

and double-click the BiP item in the Devices view.
3. In BiP Settings - Incoming VoIP Call, define the incoming call settings.
originating device and double-click the BiP item.
206
5. In BiP Settings – Outgoing Video Call, define the outgoing video call settings. Make
sure the call duration is the same for the outgoing and incoming call. Click OK.
and click the Measurement Control button. Select Wait Incoming BiP call.
207
Select Start BiP Video Call.
6.12.5.3 Testing BiP messaging manually

2. Select the device sending messages and double-click the BiP item in the Devices
view.
3. In BiP Settings – Data Transfer, define the data transfer settings. You can send either
text or an image file. Also define the number of the receiving end.
Note that the receiving end also needs to have a BiP account.
208
BiP messages and click the Measurement Control button. Select Start New Data
Transfer –BiP, Send Message or Start New Data Transfer –BiP, Send Image.
5. You can follow BiP-related statistics in a grid.
6.12.6 Viber testing

With Nemo Outdoor you can test Viber messaging and calls. In order to test the Viber
application, you will need a device with NATA and the Viber testing license option.
To start running Viber tests, install the Viber application from Google Play on your test device
and create a Viber account. Please follow the installation steps in the Viber application.
WiFi.
Note that the Viber account is subscription (SIM card) specific so have the phone
number available when creating the Viber account. Once the Viber account is created,
you must not change the SIM card. If the SIM card is changed, you must create a new
account in Viber.
It is recommended to disable autocorrect from the test device.
Once the Viber application is installed and activated, start Nemo Outdoor and start the test
devices.
Please note that the Viber item is not visible in the Devices view until you switch to
online mode in Nemo Outdoor.
209
You can test Viber manually or with scripts. If you use a script, make sure to select the
6.12.6.1 Testing Viber calls manually

1. Add two Viber-capable devices to Nemo Outdoor. One device is set up as the
and double-click the Viber item in the Devices view.
210
211
3. In the Viber Settings dialog, define the incoming call settings.
originating device and double-click the Viber item.
212
5. In the Viber Settings dialog, define the outgoing call settings. Make sure the call
and click the Measurement Control button. Select Wait incoming Viber call.
213
Select Start Viber call.
8. You can follow Viber-related statistics in a grid.
214
6.12.6.2 Testing Viber messaging manually

1. Add two Viber-capable devices to Nemo Outdoor. One device is set up as the
2. Select the device sending messages and double-click the Viber item in the Devices
view.
215
3. In the Viber Settings – Data Transfer dialog, define the data transfer settings. Define
the number of the receiving end and the text to be sent.
Note that the receiving end also needs to have a Viber account.
216
Viber messages and click the Measurement Control button. Select Start New Data
Transfer – Viber, Send Message.
5. You can follow Viber-related statistics in a grid.
6.12.7 Netflix testing

In order to be able to test the Netflix application, you need:
• an active Netflix account
• Nemo Active Testing Application (NATA) installed to the test phone
• Netflix application version v. 4.16.1 installed to the test phone. Download it from
https://netflix.en.aptoide.com
• to launch the Netflix application and login before starting measurements
217
• Netflix application running on the background

To start running tests, you will need to define some settings in the Netflix Properties dialog.
Open the dialog by double-clicking the Netflix item in the Devices view.
Please note that if the Netflix item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo
Outdoor license does not support Netflix testing.
URL defines the address of the Netflix video stream. For example,
http://netflix.com/watch/70297676?trackId=14170287
Rebuffering timeout defines the maximum allowed buffering duration during video playback.
Select the Display video stream option if you would like to view the test clip during the
streaming.
Limit duration to defines the stream length in seconds.
After defining the settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Netflix.
218
You can follow Netflix-related statistics in a grid.
219
6.12.8 Dropbox testing

In order to be able to test the Dropbox application, you will need to set up a Dropbox account.
To start running tests, you will need to define some settings in the Dropbox Configuration
dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Dropbox item in the Devices view.
Please note that if the Dropbox item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo
Outdoor license does not support Dropbox testing.
User access token is required for Dropbox testing. Click the Get Access Token button. You
will be redirected to the Dropbox login page. Enter your account information and click Sign In.
You will return to Nemo Outdoor and an access token will appear in the field.
220
Application access token is required only if you have your own application for accessing
Dropbox. Otherwise you can leave this field empty.
Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the Dropbox server. If you are
After defining the settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Dropbox. Nemo Outdoor
will perform the Dropbox data transfer.
221
You can follow Dropbox-related statistics in a grid.
File size is not written to the DREQ event and because of that, the device status does not
show a progress bar for DL or UL transfers.
With uplink data transfers the UL data throughput goes up and down. This is normal behavior
as the uploaded files are split to 4MB fragments and uploaded to server with separate upload
commands.
222
6.12.9 5GMark testing

5GMARK is an application to test and verify the end-user Quality of Experience (QoS).
5GMARK Crowd offers a limited number of test options and 5GMARK Pro offers the full set.
Download and install the 5GMARK Pro debug version into your test device from the 5GMARK
website (https://release.5gmark.com/pro). Use your 5GMARK Pro username and password to
login to the site.
The 5GMARK Crowd app is downloaded from the Google Play store.
To start running tests, you will need to define some settings in the 5GMark Pro dialog. Open
the dialog by double-clicking the 5GMark Pro item in the Devices view.
Please note that if the 5GMark item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo
Outdoor license does not support 5GMark testing.
223
Select the location type, team name, team secret, and scenario ID. You can also optionally
enter user reference, user observations, and user comment. These are all 5GMark-specific
settings.
After defining the settings, return to the Devices view. Click the Measurement control button
and select Start 5GMark Crowd Test or Start New Data Transfer | 5GMark Pro. Nemo
Outdoor will perform the test.
224
6.13 SMS testing

SMS testing allows you to monitor how text messages are transferred in the network. Open the
SMS Testing dialog by double-clicking the Short Messaging Service item in the Devices
view.
Note that the Qualcomm IMS IR.92 VoLTE option is required for SMS over LTE
testing. In addition, if you are using the Samsung IMS, you will need the Samsung
IMS IR.92 VoLTE option.
Phone Number defines the number of the mobile where you are sending the test messages.
Enter the number without spaces and with the international country code; for example,
+3581234567.
Service Center Address defines the message center number of the mobile from where the
messages are sent. The number is found from the test mobile SMS settings.
Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated.
When the End-to-end message option is selected, a unique ID consisting of 42 characters is
added to the beginning of the message text when the SMS is sent. When the measurement file
is added to the Nemo Analyze database, Nemo Analyze is able to recognize the SMS and the
time it took for it to reach its destination from the time of sending during post-processing.
All handlers support sending and receiving concatenated SMS messages.
Message refers to the user-defined test message that will be sent. The limit is set to 15000
characters.
With IMS SMS testing it is not recommended to use more than 160 characters.
225
Making SMS testing measurements:
Note that with CDMA terminals, before carrying out SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor,
you must send an SMS to the target phone number using the terminal's keypad. After
that Nemo Outdoor can be used to send the same message again.
To be able to calculate end-to-end delivery time in CDMA networks, SMS testing must
be done using the same operator between two terminals. This is due to the fact that
SMS message ID changes from operator to operator.
1. Define the Phone Number (with the international country code and without spaces)
where you are sending the test SMS message.
2. Enter the Service Center Address of the test mobile from which you are sending the
test SMS. The number can be found from your mobile SMS Settings.
3. Define the Timeout, i.e., the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is
terminated.
4. Type in the test message and click OK.
5. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button in the ribbon, Home tab. From
the Devices view, select Measurement control | Send SMS Message to send an
SMS with the selected devices.
6. You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered
successfully. Open an event grid (Data Windows | New Grid | Event Grid). Open the
Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup
menu). Clear all selections and select the Short Message Service item and click OK.
The grid will now display only the selected SMS testing-related events.
6.14 MMS testing

MMS testing allows you to monitor how multimedia messages are transferred in the network.
MMS messages can be sent manually and with scripts. In addition to successfully
sent/received MMS messages, also sending/receiving attempts and sending/receiving failures
are recorded enabling statistical success rate calculations. Nemo Outdoor measures total
MMS sending delay. Also separate delays from Attach, PDP context activation, logging to
MMSC, and message sending/receiving are recorded.
In order to be able to make MMS measurements, you will need to define some MMS-related
settings in the Packet Session Settings dialog.
Note that you need to define the MMS settings also on the device receiving the MMS
messages.
Please note that if you create a script for making MMS measurements, the script must
not contain a PDP activation command.
226
6.14.1 Packet session settings for MMS

Open the Packet Session Settings - MMS dialog by double-clicking the Multimedia
Messaging Service item in the Devices view. The MMS tab is opened by default.
Packet Session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. All the
parameters in the Packet Session and the Basic QoS and Extended QoS tabs are operator-
specific. You must select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function. Contact
the operator of the network that you are measuring.
6.14.1.1 MMS
In the MMS tab, all the settings are required in order to make MMS measurements.
MMSC address defines the MMS Service Center address. This setting is operator-specific.
MMSC username defines the MMS Service Center username. This setting is operator-specific.
MMSC password defines the MMS Service Center password. This setting is operator-specific.
WAP gateway host refers to the WAP gateway host. This setting is operator-specific.
WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway. This setting is operator-
specific.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds after which the connection attempt is
terminated.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds after which the MMS sending attempt is
terminated. In case of high MMS sending/receiving failures it is recommended to increase the
default time out time from 30 seconds to 60 seconds.
Message to be sent refers to the test MMS message used in the measurement.
Message Editor button opens the MMS Editor dialog for editing and creating MMS messages.
227
6.14.2 MMS Editor dialog

Use the MMS Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test
messages and save messages for later use.
New MMS Message saves the current changes and opens and empty MMS Editor.
Open MMS Message opens a premade MMS messages.
Save MMS Message saves the current MMS message for later use.
Save As saves the current MMS message with a different name for later use.
Save Attachments saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location.
Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test message.
Add opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message.
Remove removes the selected attachment from the test message.
228
6.14.3 Making MMS measurements

Follow these step-by-step instructions for making MMS measurements.
You should have all the measurement devices connected and activated.
Note that you need to define the MMS settings also on the device receiving the MMS
messages.
Making MMS measurements:

1. Define the MMS-related Packet Session Settings (see Packet session settings for
MMS).
2. Edit the test message and add the media attachments in the MMS Editor.
3. If you want to make automated measurements, create a script for MMS
measurements
4. If you are making manual measurements, that is, not using a script, select Send MMS
Message from the Measurement control menu or from the Measurement menu.
Nemo Outdoor will send the test MMS.
5. If you are using a script, activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.
This will start the measurement.
menu). Clear all selections and select the Multimedia Message Service item and
click OK. The grid will now display only the selected MMS testing-related events.
6.15 USSD testing
USSD testing is not supported with Huawei UEs.
USSD testing allows you to monitor how USSD messages are transferred in the network.
Open the USSD Message dialog by double-clicking the USSD Message item in the Devices
view.
Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the USSD sending attempt is terminated.
229
Message refers to the user-defined test message that will be sent. The limit for USSD
messages is 182 characters.
Sending USSD messages:
1. Define the Timeout, i.e., the time in seconds after which the message sending
attempt is terminated.
2. Type in the test message and click OK.
3. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button . In the Devices view, click
the Measurement Control button and select Send USSD Message to send a USSD
message with just one device. Nemo Outdoor will send the message.
menu). Clear all selections and select the USSD item and click OK. The grid will now
display only the selected USSD message testing-related events.
6.16 Start external application

This feature allows users to launch external applications from Nemo Outdoor as a part of the
automatic measurement sequence. You can define the executable as well as the command-
line parameters. With Nemo Invex, you can run external applications also on the measurement
servers (UICs).
The external application can be used to launch any proprietary or third-party applications that
are not built into Nemo Outdoor. This enables, for example, the testing of data protocols that
are not currently supported by Nemo Outdoor. You can then monitor the data throughputs from
the PPP data throughput parameter.
The external application feature can also be used to test web browsing. An APP event is
written to the log file when a web browser is launched and closed. The user must set the
cache size to minimum from the browser settings.
The Start External Application dialog is accessed through the Script Editor. Select Start
External Application under General in the parameter tree on the right.
230
Application Name defines the application that you want to run from Nemo Outdoor while
making measurements. Define the path where the application .exe file is located on your
computer. For example, C:\Program Files\Mozilla Firefox\firefox.exe.
Please note that clicking the Browse button will only show the folders on the local
computer. If you want to run an external application on a measurement server (Nemo
Invex), check the path from that server, for example, with Remote Desktop and type in
the path manually.
If you select the Wait until completed option, the test script will be on hold until the external
application is closed.
Arguments defines what file or web page will be opened in the external application once it is
started. For example, if you start Internet Explorer, define here a URL
(http://www.example.com/nemo). You can also leave the field empty. Note that there should be
no spaces between the characters in the pathname or target file specified in the Arguments
field.
Working Folder refers to the folder that the application uses to open and save files. For
example, C:\Temp.
231
6.17 TWAMP
The TWAMP functionality allows you to perform ping measurements simultaneously with data
transfers.
Host address refers to the IP address or URL that is being tested, for example,
www.keysight.com. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just make sure that the
IP server used will respond to the ping.
Connection Settings - Timeout determines the maximum time that Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If this time is exceeded, the measurement event will be created
by using the timeout parameter (=-1).
Transfer Settings - Timeout determines the maximum time that Nemo Outdoor waits for a reply
packet from the server. If this time is exceeded, the measurement event will be created by
using the timeout parameter (=-1).
Packet size is the size of the ping packet that is used to measure latency time. The value
determines the size of the packet sent to the server. In addition, it determines the size of the
reply packet that the server uses to reply Nemo Outdoor.
To make ping measurements:
1. Open the Ping Settings dialog by double-clicking the ICMP Ping item in the Devices
view.
2. Define the required ping parameters and click OK.
3. Click the Start Recording button.
4. In the Devices view, click on the Measurement control button and select Start
Packet Session. Wait until the status field in the Device Status window says ‘PDP
Context Activated’.
5. From the Measurement control menu, select Start ICMP Ping. If you selected the
Ping until stopped option in the Ping Settings dialog, select Stop ICMP Ping to stop
the ping measurement. Otherwise, the ping will be repeated the user-defined number
of times.
232
6.18 ICMP Ping

The ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) Ping functionality allows you to perform ping
measurements simultaneously with data transfers.
Host name refers to the IP address or URL that is being pinged, for example,
www.keysight.com. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just make sure that the
IP server used will respond to the ping.
Packet size is the size of the ping packet that is used to measure ping time. The value
determines the size of the packet sent to the server. In addition, it determines the size of the
reply packet that the server uses to reply Nemo Outdoor.
Timeout determines the maximum time that Nemo Outdoor waits for a reply packet from the
server. If this time is exceeded, the ping measurement event will be created by using the
timeout parameter
(=-1).
Delay defines the delay duration in milliseconds. In addition to the duration, also define where
the delay will occur. The options are:
• Delay between requests which means the protocol will always wait for a reply before
sending new request. If the delay is less than the ping delay, a new request is sent
immediately after the reply.
• Delay from reply to request which means a new ping is sent after a reply is received.
The Delay from reply to request option is not available with NATA devices.
Select the Repeat n times option if you would like to define the number of times the ping
measurement is repeated.
Select the Repeat until stopped option if you would like to continue the ping measurement until
you stop it manually.
233
Example 1. RTT time is 100ms and “delay from reply to request” is set to 1 s. New request is
sent every 1.1s (100ms + 1000ms). If “delay between request” is selected, a new request is
sent every 1000ms.
Ping reply
Example 2. RTT time is 100ms and “delay from reply to request” is set to 50ms. New request
is sent every 150ms (100ms + 50ms). If “delay between request” is selected, a new request is
sent every 100ms because the protocol always waits for a reply before sending a new request.
Ping reply
To make ping measurements:

6. Open the Ping Settings dialog by double-clicking the ICMP Ping item in the Devices
view.
7. Define the required ping parameters and click OK.
8. Click the Start Recording button.
9. In the Devices view, click on the Measurement control button and select Start
Packet Session. Wait until the status field in the Device Status window says ‘PDP
Context Activated’.
10. From the Measurement control menu, select Start ICMP Ping. If you selected the
Ping until stopped option in the Ping Settings dialog, select Stop ICMP Ping to stop
the ping measurement. Otherwise, the ping will be repeated the user-defined number
of times.
234
6.19 Indoor mode

Nemo Outdoor indoor mode should be used when making measurements indoors. The mode
is activated by clicking the Go to Indoor mode button in the ribbon, Measurement tab.
When the indoor mode is activated the functionality of Nemo Outdoor changes:
• To start measuring, an Indoor window needs to be open and a floorplan loaded.
• When the measurement is started, the user is prompted to select the starting position
in the Indoor window. The selected location is used to automatically create the first
marker.
• Measurement archive compression is enabled automatically, in other words, the files
below are compressed into a single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are
compressed, the original files are deleted. ZIP files can be drag-and-dropped to the
main window.
o measurement files (.nmf)
o binary files (.nbl)
o packet capture files (.pcap)
o marker files (.mrk)
o indoor map files (.tab and image)
• The floorplan file or the current floor layer cannot be changed during measurements to
prevent mismatch during post-processing.
• Information about the current mode (Indoor/Outdoor) is written to the measurement file
header.
6.19.1 Automated location mapping

Automated location mapping automatically displays the actual test route and location when
performing indoor measurement. A TRX NEON tracking module is needed for this feature.
The floorplan used needs to be carefully geocoded. Otherwise the automated location
mapping will not work accurately. Geocoding can be done with the NEON Command
software or, for example, with Google Earth. Edit the coordinates in the map tab file
when necessary.
1. Install the NEON Command setup and start the application. Sign in with your
username and password.
2. Download NeonLocationServiceStandalone .apk file and install it on your test device.
Accept possible updates, power on the external TRX NEON tracking module and pair
the device from the handset´s Bluetooth settings.
235
3. On the test device, start NATA and go to Page Settings. Activate the TRX NEON
tracker option and tap TRX NEON tracker settings.
236
4. On the NEON Settings page, you can view information about the TRX NEON tracker
unit connected to the phone. First, tap Account to log in with the account information
you received from TRX.
5. Next, tap NEON Location Service Version to check for updates and update the
software if a new version is available.
6. Start Nemo Outdoor. Add the test handsets to Nemo Outdoor. Nemo Outdoor shares
the location information from the handset paired with the TRX NEON tracker with all
connected test devices.
7. Activate Indoor mode in Nemo Outdoor by clicking the Go to Indoor mode button in
the ribbon, Measurement tab.
237
8. Open the geocoded floorplan in the Indoor Map view. Click the Use TRX NEON
Tracker button in the toolbar.
9. When the TRX NEON tracker is connected, the button stays activated and there is a
‘TRX NEON Tracker: enabled’ message in the Output view. If the tracker is not
connected, check that you have performed the previous steps correctly.
10. Make sure the tracking module is attached to a belt, or the top of your pants. The
tracking module does not work as well when you place it in a pocket because it can
move around and affect the step detection. TRX NEON tracks you best when the
tracking module is mounted to the front of your body where you would wear a pager,
or in the center of the back.
238
11. Start measuring by placing a marker on the indoor map at your current location. Start
walking and place another marker at least two meters away from the first marker to
calibrate the tracker. After this, the tracker will add markers automatically.
If the location of the automatically placed markers is inaccurate, you can add a marker
manually in the correct location to recalibrate the tracker.
12. During the measurement, you can monitor the status and battery level of the tracker
from the Nemo Outdoor Output view.
239
6.19.2 Viewing indoor maps

Open an indoor map by selecting Data Windows | Indoor | New Indoor Window and select a
map file. The supported indoor map types are MapInfo, iBwave, and Google Earth maps
(.kmz). Please refer to Google Earth documentation on how to create KMZ files. KMZ and
MapInfo maps have the same functionalities. For more information on iBwave files, please see
chapter iBwave maps.
It is possible to view selected parameters on an indoor map by drag and dropping them in it.
Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Parameters
can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the
Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-
click on the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Indoor
from the drop-down menu.
240
To view a route on the floorplan you must have a marker file (.mrk) attached to the
measurement file (.nmf). To move the markers on the map, select a marker in the Markers |
Index field, click on Move and select a new destination for the marker.
241
On the map you can view, for example, a floorplan of the test site. While you are performing
the measurement and walking around in the building, use markers to draw the measurement
route on the floor plan. Markers are added by clicking the Add marker and Add marker on
GPS position buttons in the Indoor map toolbar.
Select the Add marker tool and click on the map. The marker will be placed in the selected
location. The Add marker on GPS position tool can be used only when measuring in Indoor
mode with a georeferenced floorplan and valid GPS coordinates. The marker will be placed in
the current location.
You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map.
You can define which color refers to which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the
problem areas on a map. Map layers can be saved to .gst file and also as a custom window.
242
6.19.3 Floorplans and BTS files

You can also use BTS files on indoor maps. DAS and small cell BTS types are also supported.
Open a route on an indoor map. Click the Add BTS File button and browse for a BTS file.
After the BTS file is loaded, select a device that will be connected with the BTS file. Click OK.
243
The BTS icons will appear on the map and when the measurement file is played back, a line is
drawn from the test device to the serving base station.
244
6.19.4 Multiple routes and floorplans

You can also view more than one route on a floorplan. Click on Add Route in the Layers view
in the side panel to add a route, and go through the steps mentioned above.
The floorplan below has three routes, two with parameter-based coloring and one with a
default color. When more than one route with parameter-based coloring exists, you can switch
between the color legends in the Color legends side panel.
You can load multiple floorplans in the indoor map by clicking on the Add Floorplan button in
the Layers view. This makes it possible for you to have, for example, indoor maps of different
floors on the same building at once. You can switch between the different floorplans through
the Go Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons.
6.19.5 Indoor route planning

Prior to conducting indoor measurements, you can plan the route in the indoor map window.
You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map
toolbar, and clicking on the map. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the
side panel is also activated. A new route plan is viewed in the Layers view. You can save the
route plan for later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by
selecting it in the map popup menu.
245
The route planning functionality with indoor measurements works in the same way as with
outdoor maps. See chapter Route plans for more information.
246
Indoor maps can be also used when conducting measurements in metros.
6.19.6 iBwave maps

iBwave indoor maps can be viewed in Nemo Outdoor. Please refer to iBwave documentation
on how to create iBwave maps that can be imported to Nemo Outdoor. iBwave files may
contain UTM coordinates in addition to WGS84 coordinates. Nemo Outdoor supports both
coordinate formats when loading transmitter files. Please note that both the tab file and the
transmitter file must use the same coordinate system.
To view measurement data on iBwave maps, select Data Windows | Indoor | New Indoor
Window. Select an iBwave map file and click Open.
If the map file contains several building, choose one of them and click OK.
247
The map is opened. With the Go Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons you can move the
view between floors. From the Layers list you can hide and displays the different floors and the
BTS files for each floor.
Nemo Outdoor will not automatically place the measurement route on the correct floor.
Therefore, when making measurements on several floors, it is advised to make a separate log
file for each floor and, for example, include the floor number in the measurement file name.
Alternatively, you can add a textual note in the log file identifying the floor number in question.
This way you will be able to place the measurement route on the correct floor when playing
back the log file.
248
6.19.6.1 BTS files on iBwave maps

You can also view BTS sites on iBwave maps. An iBwave map file contains, by default, BTS
sites but you will also need a separate BTS file (.nbf or .csv) that has the same BTS sites with
matching cell IDs than the iBwave file. Without the .nbf/csv file, BTS cell information and
antenna directions will not be displayed.
First open an iBwave map and click the Add BTS File button to open the BTS file.
249
Select the BTS file and then select the device connected with the map. Click OK.
The BTS file appears in the Layers panel but to make it appear on the map, you will need to
associate it with the iBwave BTS file. To do this, right-click one of the iBwave BTS layers and
select Properties.
250
Scroll down to Linked BTS file setting and select the BTS file that you opened on the map
and click OK.
The BTS sites and cell information are now displayed on the map.
251
6.19.7 DAS anomaly analysis

With DAS anomaly analysis, user can check and verify in-building small cells and DAS
(Distributed Antenna Systems) antennas giving simple pass, fail, or untested results for each
cell.
Indoor small cell antennas and transmitters can be displayed on the indoor map with iBwave
indoor plans and Nemo BTS files (.nbf). DAS anomaly analysis is enabled from BTS
Properties.
Please note that before you can activate DAS anomaly analysis, you will need to link a
BTS file to the map.
Enable DAS anomaly analysis by selecting a device in the field.

Cell test radius in meters defines how close the marker needs to be to the cell in order to
perform the DAS anomaly analysis.
Cell transparency defines how the circle is drawn. 0% is almost solid color and 100% is
transparent.
Signal level limits (dBm) defines the pass/fail limit for signal level for each system. If the signal
level is above the defined limit, the test result is passed and if the signal level is below the limit,
the test result is failed.
Cell search mode defines on which sites the test is performed.
252
• Full: Requires that the BTS file contains the system, channel number, and scrambling
code information.
• System and channel: Requires that the BTS file contains the system and channel
number information. Use this option with iBwave map files or if the BTS (.nbf) file does
not include the correct cell type information.
• System: Requires that the BTS file contains the system information. Use this option
with iBwave map files or if the BTS (.nbf) file does not include the correct cell type
information.
When the analysis is enabled, a circle is drawn around DAS and small cell cells. The color of
the circle depends on the cell test status:
• Untested = gray
• Failed = red
• Passed = green
Whenever a marker is placed within the test radius of the serving cell location, the current
signal level of the serving cell is checked. If the signal level exceeds the defined limit (signal
level limit defined in the BTS Properties dialog), the cell is considered as passed (green) and if
the signal level is below the configured limit, the cell is considered as failed (red).
The same analysis is also performed during playback mode if the DAS anomaly analysis is
enabled.
In addition to the map view, a DAS anomaly analysis results table displays the results for each
cell. The results view can be displayed/hidden from the indoor map popup menu.
253
6.19.8 RF ingress analysis

RF ingress analysis calculates distributions related to indoor (small cell and DAS) vs outdoor
(macro) cell coverage and gives real-time information of detected RF ingress. The analysis is
based on the cell type information read from the BTS file (.nbf). A cell is considered to be
indoor or small cell if the cell type in the BTS file is SMALL_CELL or DAS, otherwise the cell
type is macro cell.
Please note that a BTS file must be set for all devices before RF ingress
measurement is started. If a BTS file has not been selected, all cells will be
considered as macro cells and the statistics calculated will be incorrect.
The signal strength comparison is done for each system and the comparison is performed for
serving, neighbor, detected, listed and monitored cells in each system.
• LTE: RSRP
• UMTS: RSCP
• GSM: RXL Sub/RXL full (neighbor set)
• CDMA: RSCP
You can also plot RF ingress on a map using the colorset Cell type (RF Ingress).
254
6.19.9 Indoor map popup menu

Right-click on the floorplan to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout
of the map.
255
6.19.9.1 Custom Window Properties dialog
In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and
select groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom
windows are available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom
window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are
playing back an LTE measurement.
6.19.9.2 Custom window - Save changes
Use the Save Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.
6.19.9.3 Custom window - Save as new custom window
Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup
menu. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the
custom window and define the custom window groups.
6.19.9.4 Save as - CSV file
Use the Save as CSV File command to export the active view into CSV format.
6.19.9.5 Save as - Image
Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.
6.19.9.6 Save as - MapInfo Tab-file
Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format.
6.19.9.7 Move view to
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group.
6.19.9.8 Open map
By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).
6.19.9.9 Save map
By selecting the Save Map item, you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving
the map with another name.
256
6.19.9.10 Import map

You can import your own bitmap files to Nemo Outdoor and use them as indoor maps. Click
the Import Map button in the map toolbar. Select an image file and click Open. The Map
Import Parameters dialog is opened.
In order for the map and route drawing to function correctly, you need to georegister the image
file or enter the exact dimensions of the map area.
To use georegistration, select Georegister and click OK. The image file will appear on the
Georegister Image map as a transparent box.
257
Adjust the location, width, height, and rotation of the image so that the image overlaps the right
spot on the map. Move the mouse cursor on top of the image so that the cursor changes into
an arrow/hand symbol and left-click with your mouse. Now you can move the image on the
map. To move the map beneath the image, move mouse cursor on the map so that the cursor
changes into an arrow/hand symbol and left-click with your mouse. Finally click OK to save the
coordinates.
6.19.9.11 Route plan - Create

The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in an indoor map
window, after which you can save the route plan.
6.19.9.12 Route plan - Open
Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on an indoor
map.
6.19.9.13 Route plan - Save
The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a route plan file (.gpx, .rpf with
Nemo Outdoor 8.0 and older) for later use.
6.19.9.14 Save as MapInfo Tab-file
Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format.
6.19.9.15 Add waypoints
Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.
6.19.9.16 Tool
The Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup. With
the Add Marker command you can add markers in the measurement file. The Arrow selection
changes the cursor back to an arrow. The Pan selection changes the cursor into a hand that
can scroll the map. The Center selection allows the map to be centered according to the
cursor point. The Zoom In and Zoom Out selections change the cursor into a magnifying
glass. You can also zoom in and out using the mouse wheel. The Clear Route command
removes the measurement route from the map. Note that this command is activated only
during measurements. It cannot be used during playback.
258
6.19.9.17 Center on new marker

The Center on New Marker option defines whether the indoor view is centered on a marker
when it is inserted.
6.19.9.18 Auto center
The Auto Center tool for MapInfo® pans the map so that the current location will stay on the
visible area of the map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto
Center command is selected.
6.19.9.19 View entire map
The View Entire Map command displays the whole map.
6.19.9.20 View entire route
The View Entire Route command displays the whole route.
6.19.9.21 Textual comments
With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add
Textual Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box
can be repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-
click on the text box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the
map and select Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.
6.19.9.22 Add site
With the Add Site tool you can edit and add new BTS sites on the map. Please see chapter
Editing BTS files in Nemo Outdoor for more information.
6.19.9.23 Color legends
Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window.
6.19.9.24 DAS anomaly analysis results
When performing DAS anomaly analysis, the DAS anomaly analysis results table displays the
results for each cell. This command hides/displays the results view.
6.19.9.25 Show current position
Show Current Position tool allows you to show/hide the current position icon on the map.
6.19.9.26 Show layers
Selecting the Show Layers item in the popup menu will display the Layers view in the side
panel.
6.19.9.27 Show marker info
Show marker info hides or displays markers inserted into the measurement file.
6.19.9.28 Show markers
Show Markers hides or displays markers on a map.
6.19.9.29 Show minimap
With the Show Minimap command you can view and hide the Minimap in the Indoor window.
Minimap displays a miniature version of the map and the current location is highlighted with a
red square.
6.19.9.30 Show waypoints
The waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. You can
create and save a route plan for later use. See chapter Creating and modifying route plans
with waypoints for more information.
259
6.19.9.31 Show zones

You can view zones on iBwave maps. Zones in iBwave files are defined as MapInfo mif/mid
files. Right-click on the map and select Show Zones to display/hide the zones on the
floorplan. Click on a zone with the arrow tool to select the zone (the map is zoomed to the
zone and the zone is drawn less transparent).
6.19.9.32 Full screen

Full Screen switches the Indoor map view to full screen. Close the full screen view by clicking
on Close Full Screen in the popup window that appears.
6.19.9.33 Layer Properties – Indoor map
In the Route Properties dialog, you can define map-related settings.
6.19.9.34 Indoor Properties dialog
Offset between routes defines the offset (in pixels) between routes on an indoor map. This
value is used with multi measurements where you have multiple routes which, without offset,
would overlap each other. You can also disable the default offset completely. To define offset
values for individual routes, go to the Route Properties dialog and define the X and Y offset
values.
260
With the Save markers in lat/lon format when the floorplan uses UTM coordinates option you
can select to save markers in GPS (lat/lon) WGS84 format when the iBwave map file has UTM
coordinates. The coordinate system used is saved to the marker file. In playback mode, the
coordinate system is detected when loading marker files so that both WGS84 and UTM format
marker files are displayed correctly.
6.19.9.35 MapXtreme Properties dialog
Click the 2 Properties button to define some MapXtreme specific properties. Note that these
settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo
Geoset file by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window. To later open the .gst file, click
the Open Map button, select MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox, and select a file
from the list.
If you are using MapInfo® maps, you can define the appearance of the map even further by
clicking the MapXtreme Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. In the Layers tab
the table shows a list of the current layers. The order on the list defines the order in which the
layers are displayed on a map; for example, in this case the Route layer is on the top, Current
Position layer is under that, and World map is at the bottom. This utility is useful if you want to
have a bigger map on the bottom (e.g., a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a
smaller area (e.g., of Helsinki) on top of that. To add layers on the map click Add. An Open
dialog is opened where you can choose the map you want to add as a layer. The map is
added on the list and with the Up and Down you can change the map’s position on the list. By
selecting and clearing the Visible option you can decide whether or not to display the layer on
the map. To remove layers from the map, select the layer from the list and click the Remove
button.
6.20 Measurement and scanning profiles

To make the measurement configuration for different devices more convenient, you can create
measurement profiles for phones and scanning profiles for scanners. A measurement profile
contains all the necessary settings for making data transfers, voice/video calls, sending
messages, etc. and a scanning profile contains the frequencies to be scanned and so on. The
measurement and scanning profiles can also be exported to another Nemo Outdoor system.
See chapter Export/import settings for more information on exporting settings. You can also
make duplicates of an existing measurement profile.
261
6.20.1 Measurement profiles

To select a measurement profile for a device, go to the Devices view and click the arrow
button next to a service (e.g. voice call or Facebook) and select a profile from the list. Select
None if you wish to remove a profile from a device.
To create a new measurement profile, you first need to deselect a measurement profile if you
have already selected one. Go to the Devices view and click the arrow button next to a service
(e.g. voice call or Facebook) and select None. Now define the settings you wish to save as a
new measurement profile and finally go back to the Devices view, click the arrow button next
to a service, and select Save as New Measurement Profile.
To edit an existing measurement profile, go to the Devices view and click the arrow button next
to a service (e.g. voice call or Facebook) and select Edit Measurement Profiles.
262
In the Measurement Profiles dialog, double-click the measurement profile you wish to edit
and make the necessary changes. You can also copy an existing measurement profile and
edit it to make a new profile.
263
6.20.2 Scanning profiles
Please note that you need to have a scanner connected to the system and Nemo
Outdoor in online mode before you can configure and use scanning profiles.
To select a scanning profile for a scanner, click the Measurement Control button and select a
scanning profile from the bottom of the menu.
To create a new scanning profile, click the Measurement Control button and select Scanning
Profiles.
The Measurement Profiles dialog is opened.Click the Add button to define a new scanning
profile.
264
The Measurement Properties dialog is opened. Enter the required information and click OK.
The scanning profile is added to the Measurement Profiles dialog.
The saved scanning profile is also added to the Measurement Control menu from where it can
be selected for a scanner.
6.21 IP packet monitoring

With IP packet monitoring, network packets sent between IP addresses are stored in log files
and can be post-processed with a third party application such as Ethereal®. A separate log file
is generated for each test terminal making data transfers.
In order to use IP packet monitoring in Nemo Outdoor:
1. First, install Microsoft Network Monitor. Go to Microsoft website to download the free
Network Monitor installation package. Select the NM34_x86.exe (for 32-bit Windows)
or NM34_x64.exe (for 64-bit Windows) installation file and click on Download.
2. Once the installation file is downloaded, double-click on it. The Microsoft Network
Monitor 3.4 dialog appears. Click Yes to continue installation and follow the steps in
the installation wizard to finish the installation.
265
3. Next, install Nemo Outdoor.

4. Restart Nemo Outdoor after you have installed M34_x86.exe.
5. Start Nemo Outdoor, add a device, and go to the Measurement Properties,
Measurement page. Select the IP packet monitor option.
Note that if the IP packet monitor item is not on the list, the Network Monitor driver is
not installed.
IP packet monitor measurement option has several states:

• Disabled: IP packet monitoring is not performed at all
• Enabled: a separate .pcap file is not written but, for example, KPI, IP service access
time is recorded
• Partial logging: only message headers are recorded. For partial logging, you can
define the packet size in bytes in the Snap length field. The minimum value is 96
bytes.
• Full logging: all messages are recorded
The IP packet data is stored in a separate file (.pcap) for each measurement terminal for which
IP packet monitoring is enabled.
To view data in packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding
function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full logging in the IP packet monitor
field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This file needs to
accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet
capture information in packet decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.
266
6.22 IP diagnostics
Qualcomm-based devices can be configured to listen an IP port in case the device supports
sending diagnostic data via LAN.
267
6.23 Making script files
Note that it is not possible to use scripts with scanners.
The script file is an ASCII file containing the list of numbers that are to be called. The
extension for script files is .nsfx or .nsf (old script format). You can edit the Script file
configuration in the Script Editor dialog. When editing scripts, it is possible to have several
Script Editor dialogs open and to copy and paste commands from one script to another.
You can access this dialog by selecting Measurement | Script Editor (Ctrl+E). Click Open
and select one of the example scripts.
The Script view at the top shows a list of all functions and parameters in the current script. The
same functions are displayed in a graphical format in the Visualizer view. If you select an item
in either view, the corresponding item will be selected in both views. Double-click an item to
edit the settings.
Drag and drop commands to the Script view from the menu on the right. Selecting an item may
open a dialog where you need to define some parameters and settings. See earlier chapters
for more detailed information on the dialogs. You can rearrange the script items by drag and
drop or by holding down the Ctrl key and moving the command with the arrow keys.
Insert Script can be used to insert the contents of another script file into the current script.
Repeat Script value defines how many times the script will be repeated during the
measurements. The range of repeat script values is from 1 to 10,000.
When the Use device settings for script commands option is selected, the settings that
have been configured in the Measurement Properties dialog are used for the script settings.
For example, if you have defined a Voice number in the Measurement Properties –
Configuration dialog, that number is used when you add a voice call in the script and the Voice
Call Settings dialog does not appear.
268
New clears the entry fields for inserting new script values.
Open opens a dialog for selecting an existing script file to be modified or reviewed.
Save saves the file with the existing name or if the script is a new one, opens a dialog for
inserting the file name.
Close exits the dialog.
Notes about script functions:

Scrambling code or removed scrambling code can be selected for conditional testing using the
IF loop.
Examples of conditions:
• “Is different”: If UMTS carrier RSSI is different than -70dBm
 Whenever the value is other than -70dBm, IF condition is triggered
• “Is changed”: If UMTS carrier RSSI is changed
 Whenever the UMTS carrier RSSI value changes, the IF condition is
triggered. The reference value is unknown, which means that when starting
the measurement and when the first UMTS carrier RSSI value is received, the
IF condition is triggered. The next trigger occurs when the carrier RSSI value
is different from the previous value. For example,
 Carrier RSSI value in the log file: -70dBm  triggers the IF string
 Carrier RSSI value -70dBm  nothing happens
 Carrier RSSI value -68dBm  Triggers the IF string
6.23.1 Script transfer stop commands

With the forced stop command it is possible to abort a current script command. You can
change the status (normal or forced) of a script command, such as voice call or data transfer,
by double-clicking the end command.
For example, a data transfer can be canceled if the serving system changes, instead of waiting
for its completion. It is also possible to set a time duration for data transfers. If a data transfer
is not completed during a user-defined time, the Nemo Outdoor application will abort the data
transfer automatically. Please note that in this case the data disconnection status is written as
Normal data disconnect.
269
The forced stop command, e.g., with voice calls, can be used in conjunction with conditional or
wait commands as well. For example, if a call should be stopped when the system changes
from GSM to UMTS, the forced stop command can be used to end the call immediately after
the system changes. In the example below, the voice call is started only when the serving
system is GSM. Call duration is set to 120 seconds. It should be noted that the actual call
duration is set with line three, Wait until system is UMTS but at most 120s. After the call is
connected, the script starts waiting for the system to be changed to UMTS, or at most 120
seconds. The call is ended with End a voice call (forced) with line 4 after 120 seconds, or
when system changes to UMTS; whichever comes first.
Figure 1. GSM voice call example. Voice call is started only in GSM and aborted when system
changes to UMTS.
270
6.23.2 Receive call

In the Incoming Call Configuration dialog you can define settings for incoming calls.
Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started
from the channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds.
Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as
the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter.
Call reception timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call reception attempt. If
the value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call
reception attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the
Call Reception Timeout value is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at
least 10 seconds.
Select the Enable Nemo Server connection option to enable incoming calls from Nemo Server.
Nemo Server Settings button opens the HTTPS Options dialog where you can define
connection settings.
Network interface defines the network interface used in E2E requests.
Own number defines the device’s phone number.
Server line defines the Nemo Server phone number.
Select the Enable Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice
quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.
271
Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample
is compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of
8KHz sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than six seconds in
testing) and sample length a maximum of 30 seconds. For ECHO measurements, use one of
the following samples: 10s.wav, 4s_m.wav, 8s.wav, ru_6s.wav, and ru_6s_wb.wav.
Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved.
The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default
threshold value is 5, which means that all samples are saved.
Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through
the Script Editor.
Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server, the
delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at
least 10 seconds.
272
6.23.3 Wait settings

To add pauses in the script, select Wait. In the Wait Settings dialog you can define different
conditions for the wait. You can also define custom conditions.
With the Wait Fixed time and Random time options you can define a fixed wait time (in ms) or
a random time (define the minimum and maximum values in ms) and then select one of the
following:
• Current time: wait (fixed or random) is added between items in the script.
• Last notification: wait (fixed or random) is added after the selected notification. Select
the notification from the drop-down menu. For example, you can make the script
pause for 60 seconds after a call attempt event. This will prevent the script from
continuing before the call attempt has completed. Note that also custom-made
notifications can be selected here.
With the Until the time is option you can define a point in time after which the script continues.
With the For all scripts to be synchronized option you can place multiple synchronization points
inside the script file. Nemo Outdoor’s script group functionality enables you to synchronize the
script files and/or certain lines in the script file for certain devices. Both synchronization
methods can be used together or separately depending on needs of the user.
In the example below both devices are doing PS data transfers. The idea is to start FTP
download simultaneously. Script files for both devices are identical except that IP address is
different. Wait for script synchronization command has been selected for both devices in the
Wait settings dialog. The Wait for script synchronization is seen on line two for both devices.
273
Both devices have been assigned for the same script group called “PS data”.
Script groups are useful especially if certain devices and when script files are needed to be
synchronized. In this example, it is not necessary to use the script group. As many
synchronization points as needed can be added to the script files. It should be noted that the
number of synchronization points between script files used in the same script group should be
equal.
The Time synchronization point command provides accurate time synchronization on both A-
and B-sides with multiple devices should be used when a certain command must be executed
exactly after an elapsed time (t=0) with more than one device. Each time the script runs into a
time synchronization point, it checks the elapsed time from the previous time synchronization
point and waits until the wait time condition is met. This way the script engine keeps the
original reference time point of (t=0) regardless of script iteration in order to prevent time from
drifting. For example, the end-to-end voice call script commands below are repeated three
times:
1. Make call (duration=30 sec)
2. End call
3. Wait (time synchronization point 60 sec)
4. Receive call (timeout=45 sec)
5. Wait (time synchronization point 90 sec)
Round #1:
Time synchronization point #1: Check if (60) secs have been elapsed since (t=0)
Time synchronization point #2: Check if (60+90) secs have been elapsed since (t=0)
Round #2:
Time synchronization point #1: Check if (60+90+60) secs have been elapsed since (t=0)
Time synchronization point #2: Check if (60+90+60+90) secs have been elapsed since (t=0)
274
Round #3:
Time synchronization point #1: Check if (60+90+60+90+60) secs have been elapsed since
(t=0)
Time synchronization point #2: Check if (60+90+60+90+60+90) secs have been elapsed since
(t=0)
Figure 2. A-party script file.
275
Figure 3. B-party script file.
276
With the Until custom condition is met option you can make the script wait for a custom
condition. Click the Edit Rules button to access the Wait Custom Condition dialog where
you can define a wait condition. For example, you can define a specific parameter value.
Until current system is: script file continues only when the system selected from the drop-down
menu is in use.
Until next notification is met: script waits for the selected event notification to appear. Select
the notification from the drop-down menu. For example, you can make the script wait until the
system changes from GSM to UMTS.
But at most value is the maximum wait time in ms if the defined notification does not appear.
6.23.4 Advanced script settings

6.23.4.1 Conditional blocks
By selecting Advanced | If/End If, you will enter the If Condition Settings dialog. Here you
can define criteria which have to be met until a set of commands between the If - End If block
in the script takes place. If the criteria set in this dialog are met, Outdoor will perform the set of
commands within the If - End If block, and if the criteria are not met, this set of commands will
be skipped altogether and the script resumes from the first item after the End If command.
277
Next, add commands to the script and drag and drop them to their appropriate places. In the
following example script, Serving sys.=5 on the fourth row in the Parameters field indicates
the criteria that were set earlier. If the criteria are met, the commands between the If
Condition and End If commands will be performed.
278
6.23.4.2 Loops
You can add loops in the script files. Select Advanced | Loop/End Loop to enter the Loop
Settings dialog.
You can select from the following loop options:

• Repeat the loop x times
• Repeat the loop for x minutes
• Repeat the loop until the time is x
• Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met
With the Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met option you can set
conditions for the loop to take place. Click the + button to define the parameteroperator and
value for the loop. Finally click OK to add the loop in the script. You can drag and drop the
commands to their appropriate places.
In the example below the voice call within the loop will be repeated twice before continuing
with the script.
279
In the example below the script is set to start and continue making calls only when and as long
as the call is connected to UMTS. As soon as there is a handover from UMTS to GSM, the call
stops.
6.23.4.3 Counters and timers

Counters and timers can be used with If and Loop commands as conditions. With a counter
you can define a number of instances and with a timer you can define a certain time in
seconds.
In the Script Editor, select Advanced | Counter or Advanced | Start Timer. Define a name for
the counter/timer and click OK. The counter/timer can now be selected as a condition in the If
and Loop Condition Settings dialogs.
280
Below is an example of a script with both a timer and a counter. On row three there is a loop
command with a counter condition called GSM calls and a timer condition called Duration. The
loop is configured to repeat a voice call until one of the following conditions is met: number of
calls in a GSM system is five or the loop has been running for 600 seconds.
6.23.5 Running scripts

After you have created a script, it will be saved and you can load it for measurements later on.
To run the script file:
1. In the Measurement Properties, Scripts dialog, select the script in the Script File
field. Note that you need to define the script for each device individually. The script
can be different for each device.
2. Click the Start Script button. Nemo Outdoor will start running the measurement
according to the script file. Note that if you have selected the Start Scripts
Automatically option in the User Interface Properties – General dialog, Nemo
Outdoor will start running the script when you click the Start Recording button.
3. The program will now conduct the measurement as defined in the script file.
4. During measurements, you can stop and start the script for each measurement device
individually while the other devices will continue running their scripts. Select a device
and click the Start/stop script state for selected devices button in the Devices
view. You can then control the device manually.
5. You can monitor the script status in the Script status view.
6. After the script is finished, you can stop the recording by clicking the Stop button in
the Home tab.
281
6.24 Call sequences

The sequence-based end-to-end call synchronization method between Nemo Outdoor and
Nemo Server provides perfect call statistics at both ends, field unit and Nemo Server,
regardless of call connection success and even in difficult cellular environments, such as out of
coverage. By utilizing timing and pre-determined test sequences, a data connection is not
required during the measurements. However, a data connection provides optional time
synchronization to compensate clock drifts and to abort test sequence if needed. Each channel
(field test terminal/landline couple) generates one file on A-side and one file on B-side. A and
B files have the same name with the « B_ » distinction and a unique call ID is written to each
call session at both ends.
The feature requires Nemo Server version 5.x or higher.
Go to the Settings tab in the Nemo Outdoor ribbon bar and select Call Sequence Server
Settings to define settings for the server connection. Please refer to chapter Nemo Server
settings for more information.
After defining the server settings, go to the Settings tab in the Nemo Outdoor ribbon bar and
select Call Sequence Editor.
282
In the Call Sequences dialog, click Add to create a new call sequence. Type a name for the
call sequence and start defining the settings.
Call sequence settings

• Originated call count defines how many calls will be made from the test terminal to
Nemo Server during a sequence.
• Terminated call count defines how many calls will be received by Nemo Server during
a sequence.
• Repeat count defines how many times the sequence is repeated.
• Call duration defines the length of each call in seconds. The minimum value is 5
seconds.
• Minimum wait between calls defines the wait period between two calls in seconds. The
minimum value is 20 seconds.
Advanced settings
• Call setup timeout defines the maximum duration of the call setup in seconds.
• Call teardown timeout defines the minimum wait between calls. Note that the call
teardown duration is included in the minimum wait between calls setting so if you
change the teardown duration, it affects the minimum wait between calls setting as
well.
• Server request timeout defines the maximum duration of the server request in
seconds.
Voice quality settings
• Select the Enable voice quality option to define voice quality settings,
• Reference sample file defines the reference sample to which the received audio
sample is compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the
samples are of 8KHz sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer
than six seconds in length.
• Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.
283
• Prefix for received sample files defines a prefix for the received VQ sample. Nemo
Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_device extension mos_date_time.wav
where prefix is the user-defined prefix, device extension the order number of the
device, mos the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but
without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For
example: VQ sample_1_34_15112004_143045.wav
• Save samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are
saved. The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value.
The default threshold value is 5, which means that all samples are saved.
The Overall sequence duration field at the bottom of the dialog displays the total duration of all
calls, wait times, and repeats in this sequence. It also includes some extra time to allow for
delays, for example, in the call setup and call teardown.
6.24.1 Running call sequences

After you have created a call sequence, it will be saved and you can select it for terminals and
reuse later.
This feature requires Nemo Server version 5.x or higher. Please refer to the Nemo
Server User Guide for setting up the measurements at the server end.
To run the call sequence:

1. In the Measurement Properties, Script dialog, select the call sequence option and
select a premade call sequence from the menu.
284
2. Define the phone number of the device that is originating the calls.
If you are running measurements with multiple devices, note that you need to define
an individual phone number for each device even if you are using the same call
sequence.
3. Click the Start Script button. Nemo Outdoor will start running the measurement
according to the call sequence. Note that if you have selected the Start Scripts
Automatically option in the User Interface Properties – General dialog, Nemo
Outdoor will start running the script when you click the Start Recording button.
4. The program will now conduct the measurements as defined in the call sequence.
5. During measurements, you can stop and start the script for each measurement device
individually while the other devices will continue running their scripts. Select a device
and click the Start/stop script state for selected devices button in the Devices
view. You can then control the device manually.
Please note that if you manually abort a sequence before it is finished, call attempt
statistics will not be accurate. Also note in post-processing that in such cases, the stop
script result will be marked as user abort.
When the measurements are aborted at the field end and then restarted, a new B-file
is opened and the previous one is closed properly.
6. You can monitor the call sequence status in the Script status view.
7. After the call sequence is finished, you can stop the recording by clicking the Stop
button in the Home tab.
6.25 Measurement lists

Measurement lists enable you to run automated measurements with several devices
combining multiple scripts. You can use measurement lists with just one device to run several
scripts one after another. Each measurement is recorded in a separate file. You can also use
measurement lists in idle mode.
In Online mode, select Measurement | Measurement List to open the Advanced
Measurement Configuration dialog. Alternatively, you can access this dialog through the Start
button.
285
Scheduled measurements displays a list of measurements that will be run when the
measurement list is started. Each measurement will be recorded in its own file. Click Add New
to add new measurements and Remove to delete selected measurements from the list.
Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-
day hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the
items below. For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows:
06May31_1. The last number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded
that day.
%a Abbreviated weekday name
%A Full weekday name
%b Abbreviated month name
%B Full month name
%d Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31)
%H Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23)
%I Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12)
%j Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366)
%m Month as decimal number (01 – 12)
%M Minute as decimal number (00 – 59)
%n Sequence number (1 – )
286
%N Sequence number (1 – )
%p Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock
%S Second as decimal number (00 – 59)
%U Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first
day of week (00 – 53)
%w Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0)
%W Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first
day of week (00 – 53)
%y Year without century, as decimal number (00 – 99)
%Y Year with century, as decimal number
%z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation,
depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone
is unknown
%Z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation,
depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone
is unknown
Measurement areas are used to define geographical areas where measurement lists are
paused or allowed to run. See chapter Measurement areas for more detailed information on
creating measurement areas.
Measurement start-up defines a certain time when a measurement is started.
Measurement completion defines when the measurement list is finished.
Select the When all scripts are completed option to finish once all scripts have finished
running.
Select the After recording duration option to finish after recording has been going on for a
certain period of time. Define the time in hours and minutes (hh:mm).
Select the At measurement size option to finish when the total size of the measurement files
reaches a certain limit. Define the size in kilobits (KB).
Select the Save statistics to file option to enable the CSV file writing.
287
Select the Send measurement results to server option to automatically upload the log files to a
server. The files are uploaded in the background and you can monitor the upload status from
the File Transfer Status view (select View – File Transfer Status).
Devices table displays a list of devices connected to Nemo Outdoor.

Script file defines the script file used in the measurement. Click the Script Editor button to edit
the selected script.
Properties opens the Measurement Properties - Script dialog.
Start runs the measurement list.
Click Load to load measurement lists and Save to save measurement lists. By default,
measurement list files (*.nmlx) are saved to the Configuration files folder. You can save and
load measurement lists to/from a file or to/from an FTP server.
To save a measurement list on an FTP server, select Save | Save To FTP Server. Click the
FTP Options button to define settings for the FTP server. See page 414 for more information
on the settings.
Define a name for the .aex file on your PC. The measurement list will be saved in this file.
288
To load a measurement list from an FTP server, select Load | From FTP Server. If you have
not defined any FTP server settings, the list will be empty. When FTP server settings are
defined, a list of exported measurement list files will appear. Select a file and click Open.
Creating a measurement list:

1. Click the Add New button to add a new measurement.
2. Select a device from the Devices list.
3. Select a script from the Script File field. You can edit the selected script by clicking
the Script Editor button.
4. Repeat the previous steps until you have a complete measurement list.
5. Select the When all scripts are completed option. Finally, click Start.
6. The measurement list is finished after all scripts have been completed.
7. To save the measurement list, click Save.
289
6.25.1 Measurement areas

Please note that this feature works only with OpenStreetMap data.
Measurement areas are used to define geographical areas where measurements are paused
(blocked areas) or allowed to run (trigger areas). Blocked areas are represented as red
rectangles or polygons and trigger areas are green rectangles or polygons.
To draw and area on the map, select the correct tool for a trigger area or a blocked area and
draw the points on the map. To finish drawing, double-click the last point. The areas can be
modified with the arrow tool by selecting a point along the edge of the area and clicking on the
new location.
A list of all defined trigger and blocked areas is displayed on the right-hand side of the dialog.
You can remove areas by clicking the X next to the area name.
The pause logic and areas work as follows:
• If only trigger areas are defined, measurement is allowed in the trigger areas and other
areas are considered to be blocked, i.e. measurement is not allowed. In the example
below, measurements will be run when the test vehicle is in the green areas.
Otherwise measurements will be paused.
290
• If only blocked areas are defined, measurement is not allowed in the blocked areas
and other areas are considered to be trigger areas, i.e. measurement is allowed. In the
example below, measurements will be paused when the test vehicle is in the red
areas. Otherwise measurements will be run normally.
291
• If blocked and trigger areas overlap, blocked areas outweigh the trigger areas. In the
example below, measurements will be run when the test vehicle is in the green areas.
Otherwise measurements will be paused.
6.25.1.1 Defining measurement areas with Nemo Cloud
It is also possible to define trigger and blocked areas with Nemo Cloud. The areas will be used
when Nemo Outdoor is in remote mode and a measurement project with trigger and blocked
areas is loaded in Nemo Outdoor.
The areas appear in Nemo Outdoor as layers on a map when the measurement session is
activated.
292
Double-click the layer to define the layer color and opaqueness.
To learn how to create measurement areas in Nemo Cloud, please refer to the Nemo Cloud
user guide.
6.26 Forcing functions

Nemo Outdoor offers a set of forcing functions that are accessible through the Nemo Outdoor
user interface. In addition to these, some terminals support more forcing features that are
accessible via the mobile keypad. See the terminal-specific data sheets for more information
on the forcing features available for each terminal.
The supported forcing functions vary between different device models and firmware and
depend on the available control interfaces. All forcing functions are not supported in all
devices. The normal method for forcing to take effect requires a full device restart. A full device
reset after forcing enhances the test device’s reliability. All carrier and cell locks need to have
band lock enabled (only bands from the target system may be selected) as well, otherwise the
locks will not hold. It is recommended that band lock is enabled prior to enabling carrier and
cell locks.
6.26.1 Channel locking

You can lock test mobiles to a channel and/or scrambling code during the measurement
process. Note that even though you are locking the mobile to a certain channel in idle mode,
you are actually locking the mobile only to the base station supporting that channel at that
moment if you make a call. As the base station can carry several channels simultaneously, the
connection can be established or handed over to another channel but not to another base
station. In other words, the channel used cannot be totally controlled by the mobile as the
system will assign the channel.
Note that when the channel lock is activated, the Neighbor Stations window displays
only Serving Cell values.
293
To lock the Nemo Outdoor test mobile to a channel:
1. When you have connected the measurement device, select the device and click the
Measurement settings button in the Devices view and select Channel Locking.
2. The table displays a list of channels that are currently visible to the device. Click the
Refresh button to update the list.
294
3. Select the system and channel number and/or scrambling code within the given limits
(it must be a valid channel/scrambling code number) and click the Lock button. You
can also select a channel from the table. The button will remain pushed down
indicating that channel lock is activated. A red indicator will appear in the Device
Status view when a lock is activated.
4. Click the Unlock button in the Forcing Functions | Channel Locking dialog to
release the channel lock or select a new channel.
6.26.2 Band locking

With the band locking functionality you can compare how the network functions with different
bands and systems. With the band lock functionality you can force the mobile to use certain
bands or system(s).
When you have connected the measurement device, select the device and click the
Measurement settings button in the Devices view and select Band Locking.
Choose the band(s) or system(s) from the list and click the Lock button. This will lock the
mobile to the band/system you have chosen. Click Close to exit the dialog.
295
A red indicator will appear in the Device Status view when a lock is activated. To release the
band lock, open the Band Locking dialog and click the Unlock button.
6.26.3 Network selection

With Nemo Outdoor it is possible to manually register and deregister to and from a mobile
network. Click the Measurement Settings button in the Devices view and select Network
Selection.
296
The Register, Deregister, and Scan functions are available only when the device is in
detached mode.
Select Manual, type in a PLMN ID, and click Register to register to a specific network. If you
select Automatic, the device will automatically select the network.
Note that if the device is registered to a network, it is recommended to deregister the
device before registering to another network. Especially when switching between
operators. Also note that all NATA devices have mobile data enabled and the devices
are attached to a network so they need to be deregistered.
Click the Scan button to scan for available networks. Note that the scanning may take several
minutes and it cannot be canceled. Select a network from the list by double-clicking the
network name and click Register. From the Device Status view you can observe the status of
the device.
To switch back to Automatic mode, select Automatic and click Register.
297
6.26.4 Carrier aggregation forcing

You can disable and enable LTE-A carrier aggregation with certain Samsung Shannon
chipset-based devices. When LTE-A carrier aggregation is disabled, the device does not
register secondary cells.
1. When you have connected the measurement device, select the device and click the
Measurement settings button in the Devices view and select Carrier Aggregation.
2. Click the Enable/Disable Carrier Aggregation to activate and deactivate the forcing
feature.
298
6.26.5 Handover control

Forcing handovers can be used to check that they work properly. You do not have to wait for
the mobile to make handovers, as you can, for example, force a handover to every neighbor
cell.
Start a measurement and make a call. Open the Handover Control dialog (Measurement
settings | Handover Control). Define the channel and handover type and click OK.
The BCCH ARFCN can be used to select the broadcast control channel (1-885) you want to
force the handover to.
The BSIC field defines the Base station identification code for the target cell.
The user has three mode request commands, Normal mode, Handover forcing and
Handover suppression. If the terminal accepts the command made by the user, the
corresponding button will indicate this. If the command fails, the user is notified. It is also
possible to send the same command several times without clicking other commands (i.e. send
a new Handover Forcing command with different bias values or forced the terminal to different
scr. code, or in GSM to a different channel without first deactivating HO forcing). For example,
the device can be forced to scrambling code 6. Once the terminal is locked to scrambling code
6, the user can set a new target cell and press the Handover forcing button again.
The Target cell settings and Non-Target cell settings fields enable the user to define 3G
offsets, i.e. enhance target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP, and degrade non-target cell Ec/N0 and
RSCP)
During Normal mode, forcing is disabled and the terminal performs 2G and 3G handovers
normally.
299
The system field shown in the Target cell field shows in real time whether the serving system
is GSM or WCDMA. When the serving system is GSM, the target cell and non-target cell
settings are disabled. In case the current serving system is GSM, but the wanted target cell is
in WCDMA, band locking can be used first to lock the terminal to WCDMA.
300
Once target cell settings including biasing information are defined by the user, handover mode
can be changed to Handover forcing mode by pressing the button. Handover forcing is done
by biasing target and non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP values. Therefore, it is also possible to
bias the current active cell. For example, in the example below active set includes only one
scrambling code. By pressing the Handover forcing button, the terminal reports biasing
Ec/N0 and RSCP values as set by the user. When the mode is changed back to Normal
mode the terminal reports unbiased values.
In the next example regarding Forced 3G handover and measurement report modification, the
terminal active set includes scrambling code 7 with Ec/N0 value -3.3dB shown as a brown
curve. Scrambling code 5 and 6 are seen in the monitored set with colors blue and green.
Scrambling code 6 is selected to be a target cell.
301
Once the button is pressed, scrambling code number 6 is active with Ec/N0 value -4.5dB.
Scrambling codes seen in the monitored set are decreased -10dB. Scrambling code 7 is seen
with Ec/N0 value -14.0dB (brown) and scrambling code 5 (green) is seen with Ec/N0 value -
23.7dB.
This situation is active as long as forcing/biasing is enabled. The device sends measurement
reports to the network with biased values.
Once the mode is changed back to normal, the terminal starts reporting unbiased values.
302
When the Handover suppression button is pressed, the terminal is not allowed to do
handovers to other cells. It should be noted that target cell biasing can be done only with
WCDMA. Biasing/ measurement report message modification is not possible with GSM at the
moment. You can use this feature, for example, to find the edge of a cell by stopping the
handovers from taking place when driving away from a base station.
Note that with scripts you can also perform handover forcing from one system to
another.
303
6.26.6 Set terminal radio on/off (airplane mode)

It is possible to set the terminal radio on and off by selecting the device and clicking the
Measurement settings button in the Devices view and selecting Set Terminal Radio On/Off.
The Device Status view will display a red indicator when the terminal radio is off.
6.26.7 Set WLAN radio on/off

It is possible to set the WLAN radio on and off by selecting the device and clicking the
Measurement settings button in the Devices view and selecting Set WLAN Radio On/Off.
The Device Status view will display a red indicator when the WLAN radio is off.
6.26.8 AMR codec forcing
This feature is available with Qualcomm-based devices.

It is possible to force a device to use a certain AMR codec mode. For example, when a UE is
forced to the WCDMA AMR WB codec, it can freely use any WB AMR codec from 6.6 kbps to
23.85 kbps.
The codecs are enabled/disabled from the Measurement Properties – Measurement page.
6.26.9 Qualcomm NV item read and write
This feature is only available with Qualcomm-based devices.
Note that this is an advanced feature: modifying item value could cause serious harm
to the test device.
The following forcing features are Qualcomm chipset specific, and the user needs to know
their specifications in terms to use them. For further reference, see Qualcomm’s QDXM
(Qualcomm eXtensible Diagnostic Monitor). The available forcing functions are: RRC version
forcing, HSDPA UE category, HSPA UE category, WCDMA RRC settings.
To open EFS/NV item configuration go to Measurement settings and select EFS/NV
Item Configuration.
Read function allows users to read item data.
To use the Write function, users must first select Accept, and agree to use the function at
their own risk.
304
Digital offline mode allows switching to digital offline mode.

Reboot device reboots the device.
305
6.26.10 eDRX and PSM setting configuration with LTE-M and NB-IoT devices
From the Devices view - UE Settings you will find controls for defining eDRX and PSM
settings for LTE-M (NB-S1 mode eDRX cycle) and NB-IoT (NB-S1 mode eDRX cycle).
Select a value from the dropdown menu and click Apply.
The Device Status view will display the selected settings.
306
You can view eDRX and PSM related events in a grid.
6.27 Cell testing

The surrounding cells of a location can be tested through an automated list of test calls that
are locked to a cell at a time. The Cell Testing dialog is accessed by selecting the device and
clicking the Measurement settings button in the Devices view and choosing Cell Testing.
You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Cell Testing. After defining all the test
settings, click Start Testing.
Phone number defines the phone number that is called at the outset of the cell test. During the
call the neighbor list which defines the cells to be tested is updated. This is necessary since if
the cell from which the cell testing is performed is a strong one, without this call the neighbour
list may remain empty.
307
Test cases defines whether the user wishes to perform Voice call or Packet call testing or
both by selecting Voice & Packet in the drop-down menu. If the user selects both, the test
starts with a voice connection attempt, and after that the test continues with the attempt to
create a PDP context with the cell. The choice of test case also affects the displayed fields in
this dialog. For example, if Voice call is selected, no Packet call settings are displayed
RX level threshold: if the cell to be tested is a GSM cell, only cells stronger than the value
defined here will be included in the test
Ec/N0 threshold: if the cell to be tested is a UMTS cell, only cells that are stronger than this
value will be included in the test
Maximum number of calls defines the maximum number of calls that are made during the test.
Voice call settings | Maximum number of retries defines the maximum number of retries to a
cell if no voice connection is formed. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo
Outdoor continues to the next cell or to packet call testing
Packet connection settings | Maximum number of retries defines the access point name for the
packet connection and the maximum number of retries for the connection attempts to a cell.
After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell
Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file
Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing.
The Test results page shows the progress of the test. The green color indicates successful
attempts, and the number the number of attempts.
308
6.28 RF validation
In order to prevent measurements with faulty antenna and RF cables, users can perform RF
cross-checking with the test devices connected to Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Invex. This can be
done using the RF offset parameter, RF test feature, level check, or scanner configuration
check.
6.28.1 RF test
With the RF test feature, users can validate all test devices before starting measurements. The
RF test gives detailed information about the RF performance of the connected test devices,
UEs and scanners.
RF test can be activated when more than one test device is connected to Nemo Outdoor.
Select RF Test from the Measurement Settings menu of a device.
In the RF Test dialog, select the test devices to be validated. By default all devices are
selected.
309
Select the Stop test manually option or define the Test duration in minutes.
Define the Alarm limits for the various parameters. A 3dB value is used by default.
Click Start to run the RF test. The test will be stopped either manually or after the user-defined
time. Manual stopping mode is useful, for example, if RF validation is performed by driving the
test route before the actual measurements.
Average and max average field strength values are calculated during the test for all serving
cells measured. Test results are shown for each test device included in the RF validation.
Each test device reports the serving cell information along the average field strength value for
each serving cell it was camping on during the test. The Max. Avg. value is the maximum
average value reported by one of the test devices measured for a particular cell. The max
average value is compared to average results reported by other devices for the same cell.
When the measurement is stopped, the dialog will display a passed/failed grade for each
device.
310
To see more detailed results from the devices, click the Save Results button. The RF test
results can be stored to a separate .csv file.
311
6.28.2 Scanner and UE level check

With the level check users can compare field strength values measured by a scanner and test
UEs. The data is displayed in a table grid. This helps in detecting possible antenna and cable
defects, but level check does not trigger any warnings. The comparison is done real time
during the measurement and can be viewed also during playback. Custom windows are
available for GSM, UMTS and LTE.
GSM (matching ARFCN)
• RxLev sub of the test UE
• RX level (ref.) measured by scanner
• RX level (delta). Difference between test UE RX level and scanner RX level
UMTS (matching UARFCN and scr. code)

• RSCP of the test UE
• RSCP (ref.) measured by scanner
• RSCP (delta). Difference between UE RSCP and scanner RSCP
LTE (matching EARFCN and scr. code)

• RSCP of the test UE
• RSCP (ref.) measured by scanner
• RSCP (delta). Difference between UE RSCP and scanner RSCP
312
6.28.3 Scanner configuration check

With the scanner configuration check user is notified during a measurement if a scanner is not
configured to scan all the serving cell channels measured by the UEs configured in the
system.
6.29 Missing neighbor detection

Real‐time missing neighbor detection can be performed with the possibility to detect both
GSM/WCDMA and CDMA missing neighbors at the same time. Missing neighbor
measurements are also supported on some Nokia terminals. You have three options in which
to perform missing neighbor detection:
• with a mobile terminal supporting missing neighbor detection
• a scanner
• a scanner and a mobile
Each cell has list of neighboring intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-system cells. A
terminal sees/measures only cells in the neighbor list, whereas a scanner measures all
available cells. Missing neighbor detection is based on comparing scanner measurements with
the neighbor list of the mobile. Hence, a possible missing neighbor refers to a cell that is not in
the neighbor list of the mobile at a given time, but is detected/measured by the scanner. In
mobile only missing neighbor measurements, the mobile is able to detect also missing
neighbors through the missing neighbor detection functionality.
6.29.1 Missing neighbor detection with a mobile

1. Connect your mobile phone to Nemo Outdoor.
In the Devices view, select the device and click the Measurement control button . Select
Frequency Scanning Properties. Select BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection in
the Frequency scanning view. Next, click on Select Channels.
313
Note that both BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection need to be selected
and Top-N option deselected.
2. Select the channels for scanning in the Select Channels dialog.

3. Click OK and OK.
Start the device by pressing on the work online button if you have not done this already,
and select Measurement control | Start Single Shot Scanning or Start Continuous
Scanning.
4. Once the selected scans have been performed, Nemo Outdoor compares the
scanning results to the neighbor list of the serving cell before scanning was initiated
and reports possible detected missing neighbors.
314
6.29.2 Missing neighbor detection with a scanner/scanner and mobile

You will need a scanner or a scanner and a mobile. If you are performing missing neighbor
detection with a scanner only, the scanner needs either of the following options enabled: GSM
Layer 3 or GSM/WCDMA decoding. Note that missing neighbor detection using a scanner
only is not available for CDMA/EVDO.
A scanner scans all possible pilots whereas a mobile scans only channels that are on its
neighbor list. Nemo Outdoor compares these two measurements and, based on the data,
reports the neighbor channels that are seen by the scanner but are not in the mobile's
neighbor list. You can observe the missing neighbors in a bar graph and also view some
important network parameters, such as, difference to strongest, Ec/N0, and RSCP related to
the missing neighbors.
Connect a mobile and a scanner to Nemo Outdoor. Configure the devices so that they are
measuring the same frequency and channels.
From Measurement | <device name>, select Missing Neighbor to open the following dialog.
The field displays the scanner(s) used. The user can also set a minimum RX level threshold
for missing neighbor. If the measured RX level is below the threshold, the channel is not
detected as a missing neighbor. Click on Enable to start the missing neighbor detection.
In GSM Missing Neighbor detection, the maximum number of missing neighbors is 32.
However, note that it is recommended to use default values to prevent false missing neighbor
detection results.
• Number of missing neighbors: Max. 32, default 3.
• RX level: -50- -110dBm, default -95dBm
315
Open a bar graph, for example, with a Missing Neighbor Ec/N0 layer (Data | Bar Graph | New,
click the New Layer button and select the parameter in the Y box). The bar graph with the
selected parameter will display the missing neighbor channel(s).
6.30 Pilot pollution analysis

Available for UMTS, CDMA and EVDO networks, Pilot Pollution Analysis measurements can
be performed in real time with Nemo Outdoor by using test terminals or a scanning receiver. In
a pilot pollution situation there are more active/monitored pilots than a handset can measure,
or there is no clear dominance for any pilots in the area. The pilot signal is used to distinguish
cells in the network from one another. Pilot pollution analysis is done based on CELL
MEASUREMENT events, and analysis is always active. The user can define thresholds for
pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor’s UI. Pilot pollution is detected when all the criterias
match.
Right-click on the device in the Devices view and select Pilot Pollution Analysis.
The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor user interface.
316
Ec/N0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -12dB.
Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/N0 value is below -12dB.
Ec/I0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set
to -12dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/I0 value is below
-12dB.
RSCP active set best above threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -95dBm.
Pilot pollution analysis is done when the reported active set best RSCP value is above -
95dBm.
RSCP (Ec) active set best above threshold (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set
to -95dBm. Pilot pollution analysis is done when reported active set best RSCP value is above
-95dBm
Polluter level window from best active set cell (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -
6dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the Ec/N0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB
from the best active set Ec/N0 value.
Polluter level window from best active set cell (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is
set to -6dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when Ec/I0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB
from the best active set Ec/I0 value.
Pilot count threshold (for UMTS): The default value is set to 3. The number of cells that are
within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. The pilot count includes
active and monitored sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than
three pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell.
Pilot count threshold (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to 3. The number of
cells that are within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. Pilot count
includes active and neighbor sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when
more than three pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set
best cell.
Start recording by clicking on the Start recording button .
6.30.1 UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone

Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called
”CELLPOLLUTION”.
The event includes the following information:
• Source system
• Source band
• Source channel number
• Pilot pollution scrambling code
• Pilot pollution Ec/N0
• Pilot pollution RSCP
• Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)
• Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)
Cell site file (BTS file) is not used with scanning receivers with Nemo Outdoor at the
moment.
317
Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time, and the results are based on earlier
cell measurement events.
318
6.30.2 UMTS pilot pollution analysis based on scanner measurements

• Ec/N0 values for pilots are less than -12dB
• Ec/N0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value
6.30.3 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Mobile phones

Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called
”CELLPOLLUTION”.
The event includes the following information:
• Source system
• Source band
• Source channel number
• Pilot pollution scrambling code
• Pilot pollution Ec/I0
• Pilot pollution RSCP
• Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)
• Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)
319
Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen, and the results are based
on earlier cell measurement events.
6.30.4 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Scanners

• Ec/I0 values for pilots are less than -12dB
• Ec/I0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value
6.31 GSM interference analysis

In GSM mobile communication networks, system capacity is often limited by co-channel
interference. This is because of the surrounding cells using the same carrier frequency, or
adjacent channel interference when surrounding cells use a channel too close to the serving
cell used by a terminal. The GSM recommendations state that reference interference will be
achieved at a minimum C/I margin of 9 dB for co-channel interference, and that the margin is -
9 dB C/I for adjacent channel interference with voice. With packet switched data connection
C/I margin should be much higher. Interference source can be a BCCH or TCH channel, or it
can be also from out of band in some circumstances. ETSI 05.05 requirements for the
interference rejection are:
• Co-channel channel interference: z = 9 dB
• 200 kHz adjacent channel: z = -9dB
GSM co-channel and adjacent channel analysis is done in real time during the measurement
and playback with Nemo Outdoor. The user must enable interference analysis similarly, as
with, e.g. missing neighbor detection. Interference detection is done based on GSM terminal
and GSM scanner measurements and these measurements are combined together. GSM
terminal continuously reports RX level, RX quality and C/I values. With RX level and RX
quality, the sub values are used to make correct analysis in case DTX downlink is used.
320
In idle mode C/I and RX level values are used to trigger interference analysis from the BCCH
channel. A decent RX level with a simultaneous poor C/I value is a clear sign of an
interference situation. Once triggering is done, the power of BCCH channel used by a terminal
is measured also by a scanning receiver. BCCH decoding must be enabled with a scanning
receiver to decode BSIC information. Power of adjacent channels are (+/ - 1) is also measured
by the scanning receiver. It should be noted that the C/I value is not available with all test
terminals in idle mode. Due to this limit interference analysis in idle mode cannot be performed
with all GSM test terminals.
During dedicated mode, RX level sub, RX quality sub and C/I reported by terminal are
observed. C/I value measured by the terminal is not available all the time in dedicated mode.
For example, when AMR speech codec is used, the terminal reports the LQE (Link Quality
Estimate) value to the network. During this time the C/I value reported by the terminal is not
valid. Please note that all test terminals do not report C/I value. Triggering points in dedicated
mode are:
• RX level sub and RX quality sub, OR RX level sub and C/I
These two combinations are observed all the time during the measurement to trigger
interference analysis. Analysis is based on TCH channel numbers if valid data is available, or
BCCH if no TCH channel data is found. If frequency hopping is used, C/I average value is
used. The user can define triggering limits via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Default values
are:
• RX Level Sub is above or equal user-defined threshold (default value -90 dBm)
• RX Quality Sub is above or equal user defined threshold (default value 4)
• Channel average C/I is below or equal user defined threshold (default value 10 dB)
The following data is extracted from the terminal and written to the terminal measurement file:
• Terminal serving channel number
• or TCH channels in case of frequency hopping
• Cell ID
• RX level sub
• RX quality sub
• C/I if available
For each terminal serving channel number X, the following data is extracted from scanner
measurements and written to terminal measurement file:
321
• Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel X

• Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X-1)
• Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X+1)
Results are written to IANALYSIS event and can be displayed in different views, for example,
in a table grid and bar graph. If BTS file is used also cell names for the serving and interfering
cells can be seen during the measurement and playback. Nemo Outdoor includes predefined
custom windows for GSM interference analysis.
322
6.32 Band scan

With band scanning all specified channels are scanned for the selected band and technology
and the strongest measured identifiers (CDMA PN, EVDO PN, WCDMA SC, LTE Cell ID) for
every valid channel of that technology type are reported. Signal strength and signal quality are
reported for each identified channel. This feature is useful in areas where broadcasted
technologies and bands are unknown. Please note that the supported band scan features are
device-specific.
To start a band scan, right click the scanner item in the Devices view and select Band Scan.
Available technologies and bands supported by the scanner are shown under Scan settings.
Please note that only licensed technologies (systems) are shown.
Select the technologies and bands that you want to be scanned and define the threshold levels
for the parameters available. Finally press the Start Scan button. With the default threshold
values it takes approximately two minutes and 30 seconds to scan GSM 900, 1800 and
WCDMA 2100 bands. The scanning rate can be increased by adjusting the threshold values.
323
Scanning results are displayed on the Scan results page. It is possible to save the results to a
text file (.csv). When band scan is executed during a measurement, scanning events and GPS
information are written to the measurement file.
324
6.33 Timeslot testing
This functionality is available for certain GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles
only.
With Nemo Outdoor, it is possible to test the timeslots of any particular channel.
Select Measurement | <device name> | Timeslot Testing and the Timeslot Test
Configuration dialog will be opened.
Phone number defines the test call number. This must be a valid number.
Run test until completed option keeps the test running until all the timeslots have been
tested.
Note that if you select the Run test until completed option, the test may continue
indefinitely. Click the Stop Testing button to interrupt the timeslot test.
The Specify call duration option enables you to define a time in seconds that the call will last.
In the Channel Settings | BCCH channel you define the Channel (BCCH) that you want to
test. Timeslots used by BCCH refers to the timeslots that are used for system messaging
and therefore cannot be accessed with mobiles. Click on the … button to enter the Select
Channel dialog.
325
Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file

Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing.
On the Test results page you can view the progress of the test. Selecting timeslots will
exclude them from the test, for example, in the case they are already reserved for data testing.
Green color indicates channels and their timeslots that have been called, and the number in
the slot the number of calls made in the timeslot. In the table you can see a list of all the TCHs
of the selected channel and their timeslots. There is a yellow frame around the timeslot that
was accessed during the previous call. Those white timeslots that were not tested will turn red.
This happens, for example, if the user stops the testing.
The Number of Call Attempts field tells how many calls have been made so far.
326
Click the Stop testing button to interrupt the timeslot test.

When there are no more white slots left, i.e. all time slots except for the ones that were
excluded from the test by selecting them (grey), the measurement will stop on its own.
6.34 Viewing graphs

There are several types of graphs in Nemo Outdoor. There are some premade custom
windows of each graph type that offer easy access to relevant network parameters. See
chapter Custom windows for opening custom windows. Also, premade Workspaces contain
relevant data views for different kinds of data. To open an empty graph, select Data Windows
| [graph type] | New.
It is possible to view selected parameters in graphs by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a
parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Move your mouse
pointer on top of a parameter in the Parameters view, and the tooltip will display more
information about that particular parameter. If you hold down the Alt key, the tooltip will show
the parameter class name.
327
Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First,
press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the Parameters view.
After this, right-click on the wanted parameter from the parameters tree and select the graph
type in which you want the parameter to be opened.
The options listed in the graph popup menu will be introduced next.
6.34.1 Graph popup menu

Right-click on the graph to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of
the graph. Through this menu, you can show/hide various items in the graph view, including
the toolbar and the side panel.
328
6.34.1.1 Custom Window Properties
6.34.1.2 Save custom window changes
Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom
window.
6.34.1.3 Save as new custom window
Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup
menu. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the
custom window and define the custom window groups.
6.34.1.4 Save as image
6.34.1.5 Move view to and Copy view to
With the Move View To and Copy View To commands you can move or copy the active view
to another view group. You can copy the active view also to the same view group.
329
6.34.1.6 Graph Properties

Right-click on a graph window and choose Properties from the popup menu to open the
Graph Properties dialog. You can also open it by clicking the Graph Properties dialog button
. Please note that the contents of this dialog vary depending on the graph type (line, bar,
scatter, spectrum).
Custom window name defines a name for the graph. The name appears in the title bar. If no
name is specified and the graph has one layer, then the layer name is used as the title.
Select Yes in the Show value labels field to view the parameter value as a numerical label
above the bar in the graph.
Value label placement defines whether the value is displayed on top of the bar or on the bar.
Axes define the parameter for the left and right axes in the bar graph. If you select Default, the
axis changes depending on the active layer. You can also define different parameters for the
axes. This is especially useful if you have two layers open and they have different scales.
Automatic bar scale option is available for bar graphs. When the option is set to Yes, the X-
scale automatically scales to the displayed data.
Select Yes in the Hide panels in full screen mode if you want panels to disappear once you
enter full screen mode.
6.34.1.7 Autoscroll
Select the Autoscroll option in order to make the graph view scroll as the measurement
progresses.
330
6.34.1.8 Device selection and Quick device selection

The Device Selection dialog enables you to view and reorganize layers by device. Layers can
be reorganized easily by simply dragging and dropping them from one device to another. The
Device Selection dialog is a convenient way to change a device for several layers at once
instead of using layer properties dialog for each layer separately.
Right-click on a graph and select Device Selection.
With the Quick Device Selection tool you can quickly select a device for a specific graph
layer. Right-click on the layer where you want to select a specific device, select Quick Device
Selection from the popup menu, and select the device.
6.34.1.9 Edit Parameters

With the Edit Parameters tool you can define what parameters are shown in the graph side
panel, in the Values view. This functionality is particularly useful for viewing textual
parameters.
331
6.34.2 Zoom - Scatter graph

To zoom in on a scatter graph, drag your mouse diagonally from either corner with the green
dot towards the corners with the red dots. To zoom out, do the same in reverse, dragging the
mouse from a red dot to a green dot.
332
6.34.3 Graph side panel – Layers

The Layers side panel displays a list of the current layers in the data view. At the bottom of the
panel you will find tools for hiding and removing individual layers, adding new layers and for
changing the order of the layers.
Right-click on the Layers view to view the Layers popup menu.
333
6.34.3.1 Grouping layers

The New Group, Rename Group, Remove Group, Move Group Up/Down and Group
Similar Layers items are used in editing and organizing layer groups. Layer groups can be
used to group parameters with the same unit and scale. Parameters in the same group will be
displayed in the same scales and the different groups will be stacked in the graph.
The Layers side panel displays all parameters added in the graph.
334
Right-click on the Layers side panel and select Group Similar Layers. The parameters will be
organized into groups based on the parameter unit.
Groups can be removed, renamed and moved up and down. You can also create a new group
and drag and drop parameters into the group.
6.34.3.2 New layer

The New Layer command creates a new layer.
Select a parameter in the Y or X field. You can also assign the parameter into a layer group.
Define the layer properties, such as, line style and color. See chapter Layer Properties for
more detailed information. Click Add to add the new layer and Close to exit the dialog.
335
6.34.3.3 New function layer

Function layers can be used to implement sum operations on parameters, such as LTE
PDSCH bit rate for Pcell and Scell. The sum operation is performed for the values of a single
source layer. Select the source layer as the Function source and define the layer properties,
such as line style and color. See chapter Layer Properties for more detailed information. Click
OK to add the new layer.
6.34.3.4 Hide layer

The Hide Layer button hides the selected layer.
6.34.3.5 Remove layer
The Remove Layer button removes the selected layer.
336
6.34.3.6 Layer Properties dialog

Click on the Layer Properties icon to enter the Layer Properties dialog. The dialog can
also be accessed by double-clicking a layer in the panel. The Layer Properties dialog can be
used to edit the selected layer. The contents of the dialog depend on the graph type (line, bar,
scatter plot, etc.).
Show extended values list displays more detailed information about the parameter.
Show n/a values hides and displays n/a values from the view.
Show legend hides and displays the layer legend information. The legend is available for line,
bar and color grid graphs, and the current parameter value for each layer is displayed in the
legend. If a parameter has more than one value, only the best value is shown. After activating
the Show legend option for the layer, click the Legend button in the data view to
display/hide the legend.
Line width defines the line thickness in pixels.
337
Stairs defines whether the line is drawn connecting two points using two lines (giving a "stairs"
appearance) or one straight line.
Draw as area defines whether the area below the line is filled.
Area transparency defines transparency value used in filling the area (0 = totally opaque, 100
= totally transparent).
Averaging refers to whether moving average is used in drawing the line.
Sorting order defines data sorting based on y-value. Data can be sorted based on
descending or ascending order. This option is available for bar graphs.
Float presentation defines the precision for floating point parameters in bar labels. This
option is available for bar graphs.
There is an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used with line
and bar graphs. The Color field determines whether the graph line is colored with a Classic
(algorithmic) or fixed color set, or whether a color set based on parameter values is used (see
chapter Graph layer color configuration).
Y scale
• With Automatic setting, the minimum and maximum values of the Y scale are defined
automatically based on the minimum and maximum values visible on the screen. If the
Automatic setting is set to No, define the minimum and maximum values manually.
• With the Use scale defaults setting, the minimum and maximum values of the scale
can be defined by the user, so the maximum and minimum values are not dependent
on the values that are displayed. Note that if you want to select No in the drop-down
menu, Automatic also needs to be set to No.
• Minimum and maximum threshold define the maximum and minimum values at
which the user-defined limits for a measurement result is set. Horizontal lines help
determine if the value goes below or above the minimum and maximum values.
Y filters
It is possible to define filters for the Y axis. Click the Configure filters button to open the editor
view. Click the + button to add a new row and then select the parameter, operator and value
that you want to view in the graph. All other values will be filtered out.
338
Some of the graph types support data tips. Hover the mouse cursor over the graph line or bar.
The data tip will display information from that point of time.
Parameters with instantaneous values display points instead of a line in a graph. Such
parameters are, for example, RACH TX Power, RACH Preamble Step and RACH Preamble
Count. Such graphs include also the following layer properties.
• Point style allows you to select among various icons such as a triangle or a cross to
display the instantaneous values in the graph
• Point size defines the size of the points in pixels in the graph
• Point transparency defines the degree of point transparency.
339
6.34.3.7 Layer device selection

The Device Selection dialog enables you to view and reorganize layers by device. Layers can
be reorganized easily by simply dragging and dropping them from one device to another. The
Device Selection dialog is a convenient way to change a device for several layers at once
instead of using layer properties dialog for each layer separately.
Right-click a parameter in the Values side panel and select Parameter Device Selection.
340
6.34.4 Graph side panel – Values and parameter

The Values view shows the layer parameter values at a specific point during the measurement
defined by the position of the cursor in the graph window. Select a layer in the Layers view,
and double-click on any parameter in the Values view to view the parameter properties.
341
6.34.5 Graph layer color configuration

Nemo Outdoor offers an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be
used with line and bar graphs, and is very useful when observing a certain parameter or
parameters, as different colors can be assigned to different channels, scrambling codes, cell
ID, etc. First, add parameters to the graph by dragging them from the parameter tree. Next,
double-click on a layer in the Layers side panel to enter the Layer Properties dialog.
If you select the Classic option for coloring the graph, Nemo Outdoor will pick up the color
automatically based on the device.
342
If you choose Fixed color, click … to enter the Colors dialog. Define the fixed color by
selecting it in the Standard or Custom page, or define the RGB for the color. Click OK. The
graph will be colored based on the fixed color you selected.
If you select the Algorithm option for coloring the graph, Nemo Outdoor will pick up the color
automatically based, for example, on channel and scrambling code.
343
Selecting Color set in the Color method drop-down menu will activate the Color set
parameter and Color set fields.
Select a parameter in the Color set parameter drop-down menu, and a color set in the Color
set drop-down menu. Note that only layer-specific parameters will be available in the Color
set parameter menu.
344
To edit the color set in question, click on Edit Color Set.. button. It will lead you to the Color
Set Properties dialog. Here you can edit the color set selected. See chapter Color Set Editor
for more information.
The parameter will be colored based on its values in the graph.
345
In the picture below you will see a bar graph colored based on BSIC numbers. Each BSIC is
presented with its own color; the channels without BSIC information appear in blue color.
Similarly, the picture below presents a bar graph where bars are colored based on BSIC
numbers. All channels with BSIC information appear in green color, and channels without
BSIC information are shown with black color.
346
The example below shows a bar graph in which bars are colored based on channel numbers.
347
6.34.6 Gauge graphs

Gauge graphs are used to display data throughput. Parameters of all layers’ throughput can
be displayed in gauge graphs. Green colour displays the minimum and maximum throughput,
and red colour the area between 0 and minimum throughput.
The example shows application throughput downlink in gauge graph.
348
6.34.7 Spectrum graphs

Spectrum graphs are useful for displaying spectrum scanning results.
By adding markers (vertical lines) on top of the window, it is possible to see the RX level for
certain frequencies shown on the side panel. Markers can be also edited, added or removed
via edit marker window.
With the peak value indicator tool you can visualize the peak value of the selected parameter
for each frequency. Open the Layer Properties dialog and select Yes in the Draw peak line
field.
349
The peak value line will be drawn with the selected color. In the image below, the peak line is
drawn in red. To reset the peak line, right-click on the graph and select Reset Peak Lines.
350
6.34.8 Color grid graphs

Color grid graphs can be used for visualizing data as a two-dimensional color grid where the
X-axis represents time and the Y-axis represents the identifier of the value to be plotted
(channel, cell, etc.). The Y-axis scale is configurable. Color of the cell in the X/Y position
represents the value. Color grid graphs are especially useful for displaying scanner data.
6.34.9 How to read MIMO parameters in a bar graph

In the bar below, graph CQI can be seen for both antenna ports. CQI for antenna port 0 is on
the top and bottom CQI value (CQI2) is for the second antenna port. For example, in the
example below three percentage of time (200ms) CQI value 6 has been used with antenna
port 0 and CQI value 3 has been used for antenna port 1. Bars are colored based on CQI type
to indentify the used CQI type. CQI type A is shown in green and CQI type B is shown in red.
351
If more detailed information about the link adaptation is needed, it can be seen from the
HSDPA link adaptation information table grid. Distribution is shown for both antenna ports from
the last sample duration which is set to 200ms. E.g., four percentage of the time during the
sample duration modulation for antenna port 0 has been 16QAM with transport block size
14411 bits and for the second antenna port 1 modulation was 16QAM with transport block size
12266 bits.
6.35 Viewing grids

Along with the graph windows, the grid tables offer you useful information about measurement
events, such as statistics from the current measurement, QoS parameters, Layer2 and Layer 3
messages (the selection depends on the technology measured), notifications, and packet
capture data.
An empty grid table is opened by selecting Data Windows | [Grid Type] | New. If you select
one of the ready-made custom windows and you have multiple devices connected to Nemo
Outdoor, you need to select which device(s) you would like to view in the grid from the Select
Device(s) to View dialog. In most grids you only view one device in a grid at a time. Open
several grid windows to view multiple devices at the same time. However, in the Parameters
grids you can view several devices simultaneously as separate columns.
352
You can also drag and drop parameters from the parameter tree into grids. Click on the
parameter and drag it in the grid.
All events can be decoded by double-clicking on the event row. The decoded message is
displayed in a split view on the right. Alternatively, you can right-click on an event row and from
the popup menu select Decode Message. To open several decoded message windows, select
Decode Message in New Window option. Change the layout (e.g. tree view or vertical table)
of the decoded message view from the icons in the view.
decoding function in Measurement Properties | Measurement before performing data
measurements. Select Full logging or Partial logging in the IP packet monitor field. A
separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement, and this file needs to accompany
the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture
information in packet decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. This requires Microsoft Network Monitor
to be installed. Please see chapter IP packet monitoring for more information.
353
6.35.1 Find function in signaling grid based on decoded message

You can use the Find functionality in grids to find message(s) with a specific string in its
decoded message. Press Ctrl + F in the grid view, select the Search decoded message option
and type the search string in the Search field. The matching message is highlighted.
354
6.35.2 Grid popup menu

Right-click on the grid to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the
grid. Note that the contents of the menu vary depending on the grid type.
355
6.35.2.1 Custom Window Properties dialog
6.35.2.2 Save custom window changes
Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom
window.
6.35.2.3 Save as new custom window
With Save As New Custom Window you can save a new custom window. Selecting this item
will open the Custom Window - Properties dialog.
6.35.2.4 Font size
From the Font size setting, you can change the font size in grids to make them easier to read.
6.35.2.6 With the Move View To and Copy View To commands you can move or copy the active view to another
view group. You can copy the active view also to the same view group.Automatic scrolling
Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the grid view scroll as the
measurement progresses.
6.35.2.7 Add/remove separator
In Parameters grids you can add empty lines (separators) to make the view easier to read.
Select Remove Separator to delete an empty line from the grid.
6.35.2.8 Open
Open allows you to open the selected parameter or statistic in another view (line graph, table
grid, map, etc.). This item is available only with parameters and statistics grids.
6.35.2.9 Event-based grid color configuration
To make grids more clear, you can color events in a grid based on the event name, event ID,
or a string in the message. There are two tools for coloring event grids: Configure Colors and
Quick Color.
356
Right-click on an event grid and select Quick Color from the popup menu. The background
color will be set to the parameter's default color set (if available) or to automatic based on the
numerical type for all columns.
Another option to configure colors is to right-click on a grid and select Configure Colors from
the popup menu. In the Grid Color Configuration dialog define a color set for each event.
You can set the text color and background color. The quickest way to define the color sets is to
click the Use Defaults button.
357
Click Edit to view the Color Set Properties dialog. Make sure that the color set type is string.
Here you can also add more events to the color set through Add…
In the String Properties dialog specify the name of the event in the Text field and select the
color code for it. If you want, you can also write a description for the string text in the
Description field.
358
Click OK. You can see color-coded events in the grid data view. Each color corresponds to a
certain type of event, defined in the Color Set Properties dialog.
6.35.2.10 Grid color configuration based on decoded message in grids

Messages and Events grids can be colored based on a string in the decoded message. In this
case, you need to create a new color set for the string. In the Grid Color Configuration dialog,
select New in the Text color set field.
359
In the Color Set Properties dialog, type a name for the new color set. Select string as the
color set type. Click Add… In the String Properties dialog type in the string that will be
colored. Click OK and return to the grid.
All messages with sysInfoType2 in its decoded message will be colored with the Decoded
message color set.
360
6.35.2.11 Grid color configuration for parameter grids

Grids can be made clearer through colors. Open a parameters grid from Data Windows | Grid
| New Parameters Grid.
Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. In the Grid Color Configuration dialog
click Use Defaults to quickly assign colors to the different parameters. If you want to create
custom color sets, select New in the color set field and make the changes in the Color Set
Properties dialog. See chapter Color Set Editor for more information.
Parameters with assigned color sets are colored according to their value.
361
6.35.2.12 Configure filters/quick filters

Another method to organize grids is to use filters. By using filters, only the selected messages
or values will be displayed. Right-click on a grid view and select Configure Filters from the
popup menu. Note that the contents of the dialog depend on the type of the grid.
For table grids, you define certain parameter criteria. Click the + button to add a new row and
then select the parameter, operator and value that you want to view in the table grid. All other
values will be filtered out.
For event grids, you define event criteria.
362
Select the Showing all option to display all events in the grid window as default. Select the
Hiding all option from the drop-down menu to hide all events in the grid window as default. If
you would like to view one or more messages of a selected type and hide others, select hiding
all lines. If you would like to hide one or more messages of a selected type and view others,
select showing all lines.
You can add a filter rule for the grid by clicking on the plus button. A conditional row
appears giving you options based on which the grid filtering takes place.
It is possible to set filtering rules for message name, subchannel and decoded text. In
addition, you can select a parameter in the Select Parameter dialog which you can access
through the Other Parameter… item in the filter target popup menu.
363
The minus icon removes a row next to it from the list. Alternatively, you can delete all filters
by right-clicking on a grid and selecting Quick Filter and Remove All Filters from the popup
menu.
The Quick Filter menu offers a shortcut to defining filter rules for messages. Right-click on a
row in the grid and select Quick Filter from the popup menu.
You can choose to hide the respective message and all similar messages either according to
the Event (Hide this Event), subchannel (Hide This Subchannel) or according to the
message text (Hide This Message). All messages with the selected event, subchannel name
or message text will be hidden. In the same way, you can choose to display messages of the
selected type only. Select Remove All Filters to delete all filter rules.
When filtering is enabled, the text Filtering will appear in the title bar.
6.35.2.13 Create notification
Select the Create Notification item to create a new notification matching the selected event.
For more information, see chapter Notification Configuration.
6.35.2.14 Decode message
This function will open the selected event row in a decoded form. You can also decode
messages by double-clicking on the message row.
In the message decoding grid you can use the Show Next Message and Show Previous
Message grid toolbar buttons to move to the previous/next message. If you move forward
or back in the message decoding grid, use the Go to Message button to move to the same
message in the messages grid. Click the Copy to Clipboard button to copy the contents
of the message decoding grid as text to clipboard.
With certain events such as cell measurement (CELLMEAS), it is also possible to arrange the
contents of the decoded message in three different ways.
364
The Format as list arranges the contents of a grid’s measurement results in a list. The
Format as horizontal table arranges the contents in the form of a horizontal table with
columns, and the Format as vertical table arranges the contents in a vertical table. The
search field in the decoded text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded
message window.
6.35.2.15 Decode message in new window

This function enables you to have several decoded message windows open at the same time.
6.35.2.16 Automatic decode
The Automatic Decode function opens up a window which displays the currently selected or
latest message in decoded form.
6.35.2.17 Save - Grid
The Save command allows you to save a selected event row as a text file (.txt). If you select
the Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is saved in a text file. You can also save the
entire grid window as an image file (.jpg). From Events grids, you can export data into a
MapInfo Tab-File (see chapter MapInfo Tab-file export for more information) or into a CSV file.
RRC / L3 events can be saved as a new NMF file. Select the event rows from the grid and
select Save – Signaling Events.
6.35.2.18 Copy
The Copy command allows you to copy a selected event row and paste to another application
as text or as decoded text. If you select the Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is
copied on the clipboard. You can also copy the entire grid window as an image and paste to
another application.
6.35.2.19 Find
The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid.
365
Type in the Search string field what you are looking for. Define if the search results should
match case and if the search should be applied to whole words only. You can also limit the
search to decoded messages only. The matches are highlighted in the grid one by one.
366
6.35.2.20 Grid Properties dialog

Right-click on a grid table and select Properties from the popup menu. The Grid Properties
dialog is opened.
Note that the appearance of the grid and the selection of parameters depend on the
grid type and on the measurement device.
You can select events, parameters, and statistics you would like to see in the grid table. You
can filter the list of available parameters by typing a parameter name in the search field (e.g.
RSRP as in the image above).
In the Selected tab you can view which parameters/events you have selected and change
their order using the arrow buttons.
Sampling interval defines how often the data is updated in the grid.This setting is especially
useful for sampling grids where parameters are shown as columns and the parameter values
are displayed on rows. A new row is displayed at a frequency defined by the sampling interval.
367
6.35.2.21 User parameters

The User Parameters function allows you to specify parameters from layer messages that will
be automatically decoded and the values displayed in the Device Status window. In the Grid
Properties dialog, click the User Parameters button and then Add in the Layer Parameters
dialog.
Parameter name and Short name refer to the long and short name of the parameter to be
decoded.
Search string is the string that is searched from the decoded layer messages, for example,
Ordered MS power level.
Layer defines the layer messages from where the string is searched.
After you have defined all the parameters, click OK. The new parameter is added to the list in
the Layer Parameters dialog. Click OK to exit the dialog. In the Parameters dialog, expand
the User Parameters item. Select the parameter you just defined and click OK.
368
The list of user parameters that you have defined are saved in a file called Parameters.xml.
User Parameters can be searched in messages grids. The user can also perform more
complex searches where the search key is split across multiple rows of data. It is possible, for
example, to search and display multiple results in a single Layer 3 message.
It is possible to export and import user parameters from and to Nemo Outdoor. See chapter
Export/import settings for more information.
6.36 Viewing maps

Nemo Outdoor supports several types of outdoor maps: Google, MapXtreme, and
OpenStreetMap maps. Most of the functions are the same for all types but there are some
differences.
Nemo Outdoor versions up to 7.90 support MapX and later versions MapExtreme.
Please note that in order to use OpenStreetMap maps, the computer needs to be
connected to the Internet or OpenStreetMap data must be downloaded on the
computer.
Map data caching is not allowed with Google maps so you must zoom and position
the map to the correct location before starting the measurement.
369
Open a map by selecting Data Windows | Map | [map type]. If you open a new MapXtreme
map, Nemo Outdoor will open by default the map that you have entered in the Default Map
field in the User Interface Properties dialog, Paths tab. If you open an OpenStreetMap map,
the view will center on your current location.
Note that the Indoor map differs from the example below. For information on Indoor
measurements, refer to chapter Viewing indoor maps.
It is possible to view selected parameters on a map by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a
parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the map. Parameters can also be
opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button
and select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the
parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Map from the drop-
down menu.
If you have a GPS receiver connected to the test system, the current location of the test
vehicle will be displayed on the map as a circle on the route. If there is no GPS connected to
the system, you can define the current location manually with the Set Current Location tool
(the button is activated when recording is started). A new GPS event is created in the
handler after which all location-specific data, such as BTS cell names are displayed using the
specified location.
370
You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map.
You can define which color refers to which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the
problem areas on a map.
While viewing notifications on a map, hovering above the notification icons will display a tooltip
with information such as cell name (if cell site file is used) and channel number.
6.36.1 Base stations on a map

If you select a BTS file (.nbf or .csv) for the measurement file, the base stations will be
displayed. A line will be drawn from the test vehicle to the serving base station. Also, the
distance to the serving base station is displayed in the status bar of the map window.
Note that the BTS file is displayed only if a device is associated with the BTS file (BTS
Properties – Connected devices).
The BTS icons display the antennas, the channel numbers for the antennas, and directions
that the antennas point to. The antennas are drawn in one degree steps. Hover your mouse
over the base station icon to see more information about the BTS.
Note that if there are more than five cells in a BTS, the BTS name will be truncated
with “…” In this case, click on the BTS icon to view the rest of the cells.
6.36.1.1 Importing BTS data

Nemo Outdoor supports user-configurable BTS data import. You can import BTS data, for
example in .csv, .html or .nbf format, and specify the column mapping in Nemo Outdoor so that
the data can be opened in Nemo Outdoor. The column mapping settings are saved as a BTS
template and this template can be used later on to quickly import BTS data from files of similar
format.
To create a new BTS template, go to the Measurement Properties – General page, select
the source data in the BTS file field, and click Create Template File.
371
The column on the left (Template) shows the column headings in the customer’s own data and
the second column (Nemo) defines what column it corresponds with in the Nemo BTS file
format. You should define at least the mandatory columns: SYSTEM, SITE, CELL, LAT, and
LON. All unmapped columns will be loaded as user-defined columns. Finally save and click
OK.
The BTS template file is now saved and it can be used for other files. The saved BTS
templates are available in the BTS Template File Selection dialog which can be accessed
from the Measurement Properties – General page and from the BTS Properties dialog of map
and indoor data views.
372
6.36.1.2 Editing BTS files in Nemo Outdoor

It is possible to edit the locations of base station icons directly in Nemo Outdoor. Open a BTS
file on a map. Right-click on a BTS icon and select Move. Then click on the new location and
the BTS icon is moved there. You can also remove BTS sites from the BTS file. The changes
are saved in the BTS file when you exit Nemo Outdoor.
373
Right-click on a BTS icon and select Edit or right-click on the map and select Base Stations |
Add Site. In the BTS Editor you can edit the site and cell information. You can also add new
sites, cells, and neighbor cells by clicking the Add button.
For sites, you must define the following information: site name, longitude, and latitude.
Under sites you have cells. For cells there are some mandatory and optional settings.
The settings below are mandatory. The available settings depend on the system.
System defines in which cellular system the cell belongs.
Cell name defines a unique name for the cell.
Antenna direction defines the direction of the antenna in degrees.
Channel number defines the channel number.
374
Cell ID/Cell ID 16-bit defines a unique cell ID for the cell.

Radio network controller ID defines a unique radio network controller ID for the cell.
Scrambling code defines a unique scrambling code for the cell.
The settings below are optional.
Antenna height defines the height of the antenna from the ground in meters.
Antenna tilt defines the angle of the main beam of the antenna relative to the horizontal
plane.
Antenna beam width defines the width of the beam in degrees.
Cell range defines the range of the cell in kilometers.
For Cell type the options are undefined, normal, repeater, DAS (for WLAN), and small cell (for
WLAN).
Location area code defines in which location area the cell belongs.
Routing area code defines in which routing area the cell belongs.
UTRAN registration area defines in which UTRAN registration area the cell belongs.
Frequency (for WLAN) defines the cell frequency in MHz.
Service set identifier (for WLAN) defines the SSID, a unique identifier for the cell.
IEEE 802.11 protocol (for WLAN) defines the IEEE 802.11 protocol of the cell.
6.36.2 MapXtreme maps

You can customize the MapXtreme map view using the MapXtreme properties. The
customized settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file (.gst) and loaded later on. MapInfo
Workspaces (*.wor file) cannot be directly opened with MapXtreme, but can be saved as a .gst
file in MapInfo Professional using the MapInfo MapXtreme Geoset Utility tool (Geoset.mbx)
that ships with version 5.x of MapInfo Professional. This file (.gst) can be directly opened by
MapXtreme in Nemo Outdoor.
Each MapInfo® raster map has two files: an image file (.tif. .gif, .jpg) and a .tab file When
MapInfo raster maps are used, the image file is the actual map image file. The .tab file
contains information about a map (such as location coordinates) and is used by Nemo Outdoor
to refer to a particular map. When using vector data for MapInfo®, there are three different files
that need to be in the same directory, the .tab, .map, and the .id file. The corresponding image
and .tab files for raster maps have to be in the same folder in order to view a MapInfo® map. If
you are using a large map (size over 1 Mb), updating the map window will slow down Nemo
Outdoor functions. We recommend you minimize the map size by reducing the number of
colors to 256 or 16, or turning the color map to black and white.
6.36.2.1 MapInfo Tab-file export
To export a route plan, create a route plan, right-click on the map and select Route Plan |
Save as MapInfo Tab-File.
The MapInfo Tab-File Export dialog displays a list of parameters or items that can be
exported. Select the items that you would like to include in the .tab file. Also define a File
name and Layer title for the exported .tab file.
375
To change the symbol for each parameter, double-click the parameter or select a parameter
and click the Change Symbol button. The symbol is used to draw the route in MapInfo. In the
Symbol Style dialog, you can select the symbol and define some effects and background
color for it. Finally click OK.
Click OK in the MapInfo Tab-File Export to save the .tab file.
376
6.36.3 Route plans

Route plans are useful when you want to follow a certain route while performing a
measurement. You can create route plans automatically from a measurement in playback
mode, or you can manually create one with the Add waypoint functionality both during a
measurement and during playback. In addition, you can alter the route plans at any point
through the control buttons in the Waypoints view in the map side panel. You can save a route
plan as a route plan file (.gpx), and if you have made any changes to the route plan properties
in the map window, you can save them as a custom window for later use. The custom window
will also contain changes made to the color set or Waypoints views.
If you have previously created and saved a route plan, you can open it through the Open
Route Plan item in the map toolbar or by right-clicking on the map and selecting Route
Plan | Open from the popup menu. The route plan is now viewed on the map and in the map
side panel, and is ready to be used in a measurement. By pressing Ctrl+A you can jump from
one waypoint to the next.
6.36.3.1 Creating and modifying route plans with waypoints

You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map
toolbar, or by selecting Add Waypoint in the map popup menu, and clicking on the map. The
Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also activated. A new
route plan appears in the Layers view, and the Waypoints view is enabled. You can save the
route plan for later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by
selecting it in the map popup menu.
377
You can define waypoint-related settings in the Waypoint view in the side bar. The Show next
waypoint option should be selected when you want to view the next waypoint on the map
during a measurement. Note that the Show next waypoint functionality is only enabled in
online or idle mode, not during playback. The next waypoint is shown on the route as a big
circle. If you clear the Show next waypoint option, the Waypoint detection radius and
Distance to next waypoint items will also be disabled.
The Waypoint detection radius slider indicates at which distance (meters) the next waypoint
is selected. As you approach the next waypoint during a measurement, the next waypoint is
selected on the map when distance to it is smaller than the distance selected in the slide bar.
The Distance to next waypoint field indicates how many meters there still are to the next
waypoint from the current position on the route, so the figure decreases as you approach the
next waypoint. The Distance from previous waypoint field indicates how many meters it is
from the previous waypoint from the current position on the route. With the Next button you
can move from one waypoint to the next.
You can make changes to the route plan using the buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints
view.
To select a waypoint on the map, click on the Select button in the Waypoints view, then select
a waypoint on the map. This waypoint is shown as a bigger circle than the others. In addition,
the delete functionality is only enabled when the Select button is selected. If you click on
Delete, the selected waypoint on the route plan will be deleted, and the previous waypoint on
the route will automatically be selected and shown as a bigger circle. If the deleted waypoint
was the first waypoint on the route plan, the next waypoint on the route will be selected.
Moreover, the Delete button is only enabled with the Select button if there is more than one
waypoint on the map. Reclick on Select to clear the functionality.
You can move waypoints on the map by first clicking on Select, then selecting a specific
waypoint on the map. Click on the Move button, and you will be able to move the selected
waypoint on the map. The part of the route attached to the waypoint is moved with the
waypoint. With the Reverse button you can reverse the direction of the route plan.
378
The Add button in the Waypoints view in the side panel is synchronized with the Add
waypoint button in the map toolbar. If you click on either button when they are inactive,
they will both be activated, and conversely if you click on either button when active, they will
become inactive. When you select either, you are able to place new waypoints in the route
plan.
6.36.3.2 Creating and saving route plans from a measurement
In addition to creating a route plan with waypoints, you can create a route plan from a
measurement.
Start Nemo Outdoor, load a measurement file and open a map window. Right-click on the map
and select View Entire Route, or zoom in on the map to make sure the measurement
contains GPS coordinates. Create a route plan by clicking the Create Route Plan toolbar
icon, or select Route Plan | Create from the map popup menu. The route plan should now be
visible on the map, the layer list should have a new layer (“Untitled.gpx”), and the control
buttons on the Waypoints view should be enabled. The route plan should closely follow the
route from which it was created. Save the route plan by clicking the Save Route Plan item
in the toolbar, or by selecting it in the map popup menu.
You can also modify the route plan with the Select, Move, Add and Delete buttons at the
bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel. Note that when you click on Select, you may
need to zoom in on the map to view the discrete waypoints. The selected waypoint will show
as a bigger circle among all the circles. See chapter Creating and modifying route plans with
waypoints for more information on how to use the control buttons, and on how to read the
waypoints on the route plan during a measurement.
6.36.3.3 Saving a route plan to a custom window

When you create a route plan and save it, the actual route plan will be saved as a route plan
file (.gpx). However, if you have made changes to the default map window and to the layer-
specific properties, and you want to save these changes, you need to save the map window as
a custom window. When you open a measurement the next time, you can open the custom
window by right-clicking on the gray space outside the map window, and select Map | [name
of custom window].
First, create or open a route plan, and save it. Next, double-click on the route plan in the map
side panel to access the Route Plan Properties dialog, change the properties and click OK.
Change the settings in the Waypoints view in the side panel, right-click on the map, and
select Save As Custom Window in the map popup menu. Close the map and open the
custom window you saved. When you open the properties dialog, the properties should be
what you set them to.
379
6.36.4 Navigation Assistant

The Navigation Assistant feature in Nemo Outdoor provides turn-by-turn navigation for drive testing.
The feature requires a TomTom Bridge device and Nemo Cloud for creating measurement routes. This
section introduces this functionality on the Nemo Outdoor and Navigation Assistant side. For
instructions on how to create routes in Nemo Cloud and assign them to Nemo Outdoor, see the Nemo
Cloud User Guide.
Do not configure the navigation device or Navigation Assistant while you are driving
for traffic safety reasons.
When using TomTom Bridge with Nemo Invex II, connect the TomTom Bridge device
first before connecting other test devices.
1. Install the latest version of Navigation Assistant to your TomTom Bridge device (refer to chapter
Updating Navigation Assistant software).
2. On the TomTom Bridge device, enable USB Tethering. Select Settings - Wireless &
networks, More.
380
3. Select Tethering & portable hotspot.
4. Select USB tethering.
USB tethering must be enabled every time when the TomTom Bridge device is
started/restarted.
5. Once USB tethering is enabled, connect the TomTom device with a USB cable to the Nemo
Outdoor laptop.
6. Start the Nemo Navigation Assistant on the TomTom Bridge device.
381
7. When the Navigation Assistant is started for the first time, the device will ask for permission to
access the device’s location and files. You will need to allow all access to the Navigation
Assistant. Otherwise the feature will not work. Tap Allow and Allow.
8. Tap Permission Settings.
382
9. Tap Permissions.
10. Allow access to location and storage.
11. Once the navigation assistant starts, tap the button in the upper left corner and select
Connectivity. Check that Connection type is WiFi/USB tethering. Connection status should
display Waiting for WiFi connection.
12. In Nemo Outdoor, open the Nemo Navigation Assistant view (View | Nemo Navigation
Assistant).
383
13. Click on Connect to navigator. Connection status will change from Disconnected to Idle. In the
TomTom Bridge, the connection status will change to WiFi connected on the Connectivity page.
14. Add the measurement device(s) in Nemo Outdoor and go online.

15. Load a route plan to Nemo Outdoor. You can create the route plan with Nemo Outdoor or
Nemo Cloud. Select a GPX file in the Nemo Outdoor Nemo Navigation Assistant view. Click the
… button next to the Route file field and load a valid GPX file. Click Preview in map window
to preview the file before sending it to the navigator. Click Send to navigator. The route will
appear in the TomTom Bridge device.
16. If you have assigned the Nemo Outdoor unit to a project in Nemo Cloud, the route is transferred
to the navigation device automatically from Nemo Outdoor after the project information is
downloaded from Nemo Cloud to Nemo Outdoor (see for example chapter Work orders for
more information).
17. Go to the map view of the TomTom Bridge device and select Start Measurement. Nemo
Outdoor starts measuring.
18. When the test drive is finished, select Stop Measurement.
6.36.4.1 Using Navigation Assistant

The Navigation Assistant view has three pages that can be accessed by tapping on the
upper right-hand side of the screen: Map, Work orders, and Connectivity.
384
The map page displays a map from the navigation device´s navigation system and displays
the route. On the right, you can see the Navigation Assistant widget that displays information
about, for example, the Nemo Outdoor unit connected to the navigation device.
With the jump-to-route button , visible in the selection bar, you can start the measurement
route from a location that is not the starting point of the route. Tap the button to display a slider
that you can use to select the starting point. This functionality is particularly useful when a
measurement route cannot be driven through, for example, because of a roadblock.
The work orders page displays the work orders sent from Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Cloud.
Connectivity page displays the connection status and type of the navigation device.
Tap the Navigation button ( ) on the selection bar to display the Navigation view. The
assigned route is shown on the map and the Nemo Navigation widget displays information
regarding the paired measurement tool and the measurement project assigned for it.
Project information is displayed in the Nemo Navigation Assistant view in the navigation
device. You can start measurements straight from this view. In the example below, the Nemo
tool has been assigned with two work orders, Kastelli and Raksila, from Nemo Cloud, and
these two work orders are displayed on the Nemo Navigation Assistant application.
385
You can select which work order to activate by tapping the Activate button visible on the right
side of the view. Once you have activated the work order, the route configured to that work
order is displayed on the map. Tapping the jump-to-route icon in the selection bar takes
you back to the navigation view in the navigation device.
Alternatively, go to Nemo Outdoor and select a work order by clicking Activate.
If you are not in the location where the measurement route is set to begin, the navigation
device will first guide you to the start point of the measurement route. Tapping Enable Auto-
Start will automatically start the measurement once you have reached the starting point of the
measurement route. You can also start the measurement manually by tapping Start
Measurement on the Nemo Navigation Assistant widget.
Follow the directions of the navigation device through the route. The start of the route is
indicated with a round icon and end of the route with a flag. When you are at the end-point of
the measurement route, the navigation device informs you that you have reached the end of
the route, and navigation is stopped. The navigation status changes to idle and a button that
you can download the route again is shown. You can stop the measurements by tapping Stop
Measurement on the Nemo Navigation Assistant widget.
When measurements are ready, the field units send the log files for post processing. The
collected data can be directly analyzed with Keysight´s Nemo post-processing tools.
6.36.4.2 Updating Navigation Assistant software

1. First, you need to change the security settings of the TomTom Bridge to allow it to
accept applications from an unknown source. Go to Settings -> Security -> Unknown
sources. Make sure the checkbox next to this is selected.
2. Connect the TomTom Bridge to your computer using the USB cable supplied with your
device, then switch your device on.
Use ONLY the USB cable supplied with your device. Other USB cables may not work.
Also, plug the USB cable directly into a USB port on your computer and not into a
USB hub or USB port on a keyboard or monitor.
Do not use the mount to connect your device to your computer.
386
3. On your computer, open a file manager program.

4. Your device appears in your computer's files system as TomTom Bridge.
5. Copy Nemo Navigation Assistant APK File from your computer to a folder on your
TomTom device.
6. If your TomTom device does not have a file manager app, go to the Bridge Store and
install an app (e.g. OI File Manager). Go to All Apps and start the OI File Manager
app.
7. Find the APK file and tap it. The app will begin installing on your device.
8. Disconnect the device from your computer.
6.36.5 Map popup menu

Right-click on the map to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of
the map. Please note that the contents of the menu depend on the map type.
387
6.36.5.1 Custom Window - Properties
6.36.5.2 Custom window - Save as new custom window
Right-click on a graph window and select Custom Window - Save as New Custom Window
from the popup menu. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a
name for the custom window and define the custom window groups.
6.36.5.3 Custom window - Save changes
Use the Custom Window - Save Changes command to save changes made in the custom
window.
6.36.5.4 Save as - CSV file
Use the Save as CSV File command to export the active view into CSV format.
6.36.5.5 Save as - Image
6.36.5.6 Save as - MapInfo Tab-file
Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-file command to export the active view into MapInfo format.
6.36.5.7 Save as MapInfo Geoset
Use the Save as MapInfo Geoset command to export the active view into MapInfo Geoset
format.
6.36.5.8 Export to Google Earth
By clicking on the Export to Google Earth item you can export a map with measurement route,
colors based on selected parameter, notifications, and base station information to Google
Earth .kml file which can be viewed with the installed Google Earth application.
6.36.5.9 Font size
From the Font size setting, you can change the font size of data written on map (active cell
IDs, etc.) to make them easier to read.
388

With the Move View To and Copy View To commands you can move or copy the active view
to another view group. You can copy the active view also to the same view group.
6.36.5.11 Open map
By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).
6.36.5.12 Find map at position

When you right click on the map and select the Find Map at Position item, Nemo Outdoor will
display a list of possibly more detailed maps of the same location from the directory you have
specified in the View | User Interface Properties | Paths dialog (by default C:\Nemo
Tools\Maps). In this way you have the possibility to choose the most appropriate map for your
purposes. Click the Add Layer button to add a suggested layer on the map.
If there is a test route on the map, the suggested maps are from the area where the route is
running.
If there is no route on the map, the suggested maps are from the visible area.
6.36.5.13 Base stations - Add site

With the Add Site tool you can edit and add new BTS sites on the map. Please see chapter
Editing BTS files in Nemo Outdoor for more information.
389
6.36.5.14 Base stations - Find cell

With Find Cell functionality you can search for a cell in a map window based on a parameter.
Below a cell is searched based on its Cell ID number. You can also search for custom data
entered in the BTS file header and for neighbor cells.
6.36.5.15 Change view - Previous view, View entire map, and View entire route
With the Previous View command, you can return to the previous map view, and the View
Entire Map command displays the whole map. By selecting the View Entire Route item you
will be able to view the whole route on the map.
6.36.5.16 Color legends

The Color legends view shows the selected color set for a measurement route. If you have
loaded a multi measurement and added multiple routes with assigned color sets on the map,
the color legends will be shown in separate tabs. See chapter Color Set Editor on how to
create and edit color sets.
6.36.5.17 Route - Add a waypoint to route plan

Activates the Add Waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.
6.36.5.18 Route – Create route plan

The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in a map
window.
6.36.5.19 Route – Open route plan

Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on a map.
6.36.5.20 Route – Save route plan

The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a route plan file (.gpx) for later
use.
390
6.36.5.21 Route – Save route plan as MapInfo Tab-file

The Save Route Plan as MapInfo Tab-File item will let you save the route plan as a .tab file
that can be opened in MapInfo.
6.36.5.22 Route – Clear route

Clear Route tool removes the measurement route from the map. Note that this command is
activated only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback.
6.36.5.23 Route – Modify route

With the Modify Route tool you can modify and reposition the measurement route in playback.
This is especially useful if there is a gap in the measurement route, for example, because GPS
fix was lost in a tunnel. Select the tool. The route will be displayed as dots.
Drag and drop the dots into their new positions. Please note that you should maintain the
correct order of the dots. Otherwise the route will appear jagged.
When you have finished modifying the route, right-click on the map and clear the Modify Route
tool. The modified route is now displayed in normal mode.
6.36.5.24 Route – Set current location

Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. Note
that this command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. It
cannot be used during playback.
6.36.5.25 Route – Show current position
Show Current Position tool allows you to show/hide the current position icon on the map.
391
6.36.5.26 Route – Show route history
If the Route History side panel is not visible, right-click on the map and select Route | Show
Route History. With the Route History tool you can search for measurements recorded
within a specified time frame and plot those measurement routes on a map. This requires that
a GPX file has been created for the measurement. Define the folder from where GPX files will
be searched and define the time frame. After you click the Search button, Nemo Outdoor will
search for the GPX files and display the matching routes on the map.
The search results will also be displayed as layers. When the Add as separate layers option
is selected, each measurement will be added as a separate layer. If the option is not selected,
all measurements found within one search will be added to a single route history layer, and the
name of the layer will be the search range.
Double-click the route history layer to open the Route History Route Properties dialog where
you can edit the route color and thickness.
6.36.5.27 Route – Show waypoints
The Show Waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. You
can create and save a route plan for later use. The Show next waypoint field is only
activated when at least one device and one GPS receiver are attached to Nemo Outdoor in
online or offline mode. This functionality is not active during measurement playback. See
chapter Creating and modifying route plans with waypoints for more information.
6.36.5.28 Open StreetMap - Download tiles
With the Download Tiles tool you can download OpenStreetMap data on your computer so
you can use the OpenStreetMap maps even when you are not connected to the Internet.
It is recommended to use this method always with OpenStreetMap maps as

downloading map data in the middle of measurements may affect the results.
Alternatively, activate the offline mode (see below).
392
Zoom levels defines the number of levels from which map data is downloaded. The more
levels you choose the more data is downloaded.
Select the Reload existing tiles option to overwrite existing map data.
Click the Select Area button to the select an area with your mouse from where map data will
be downloaded.
6.36.5.29 Open StreetMap - Empty disk cache
Select the Empty Disk Cache option to delete all downloaded OpenStreetMap data. The tiles
open on the map will not be deleted.
6.36.5.30 Open StreetMap – Offline mode

In offline mode, OpenStreetMap data is not downloaded. Using this method is recommended
as downloading map data in the middle of measurements may affect the results.
6.36.5.31 Layer properties
The dialog appearing when you click on the Layer Properties item depends on the layer
selected in the map side panel. It is possible to view three different kinds of layers in the side
panel: the device-specific measurement route layer, the base station layer, and the route plan
layer.
393
6.36.5.32 Route properties
In the Route Properties dialog, you can define map-related settings. With the Reset to default
properties and Use previous properties buttons you can quickly change settings for a route
layer.
Device defines the device that is being viewed on the map.
Select the Show Device Label next to route option to display the device name at the starting
point of the measurement route.
Line thickness defines the thickness of the route in pixels.
The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions.
To define a default offset between multi-measurement routes, go to the Indoor Properties
dialog.
394
With the Show parameters next to route option you can display a selected parameter value
in numerical format next to the route. Click the Add new parameter button to select the
parameter and define the text and background colors.
You can also define a filter for the selected parameter, for example, to select only the best or
second best value to be shown.
Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction.
The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line. If
the Draw as dots item is selected, the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot
size in pixels.
When the Draw during pause option is deselected, the route is not drawn when measurement
is paused.
Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. The entire route is drawn
with the same color.
If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values, select Yes for Use color
set. First, select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. Then select a
matching color set in the Color set field or select New to create a new color set. Click the Edit
Color Set button to access the Color Set Editor dialog. See chapter Color Set Editor for more
information on defining color sets.
Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route,
the route will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have
valid values. Therefore, it is best not to use the default color in the color set.
395
If you are measuring with a scanner, click on Configure Filters to select specific channels,
frequencies, scrambling codes, or beam indexes for which the parameter values are displayed.
To filter spectrum scanning results, define the frequency exactly in the same format as it
appears in the Spectrum graph.
To select scrambling codes, first select a channel by clicking the Select button under Selected
channel numbers. Then select scrambling codes for the selected channel by clicking the
Select button under Selected scrambling codes.
If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route, select the Trend line option and select
from the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average
value.
When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected, the default color is not drawn. For
example, if the route is colored based on Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM, the system
route is not drawn while in GSM.
Selecting the Show notifications option will view notifications on the indoor map. You can
define the size of the notifications in pixels in the Size field.
Connected BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. Select a
BTS file by clicking the Add BTS File button in the map side panel.
Select the Draw line to active base station option to draw a line from the serving BTS to the
test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.
Select the Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the neighboring cells to
the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.
Select the Draw only to active system cell(s) option if you only want to draw a line from
active system cell(s) to the test vehicle.
Select the Draw only to n strongest neighbor cells option to draw a line to a defined
maximum number of strongest neighbors (per system) based on the following parameters:
396
• GSM: RX Level Sub (if available) or RX Level Full

• UMTS: Ec/N0
• CDMA/EVDO: Ec/Io
• LTE: RSRP
Select the Draw line(s) to detected neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the detected
neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.
Select the Draw line(s) to missing neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the missing
neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note
that lines to missing neighbor cell(s) are drawn only when measuring with a mobile and a
scanner. If missing neighbor detection is performed using a scanner only, this information is
not shown on the map. Instead, the missing neighbor information can be viewed in a table grid.
Select the Draw line(s) to interferer cell(s) option to draw a line from interferer cells to the
test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note that a BTS file must be
used with this feature. GSM interfering analysis results (IANALYSIS event) are written to the
terminal output file and due to this reason, the interfering cells can be seen on a map only
when a BTS file is used with the terminal.
By selecting the Show Textual notes option, you will be able to view textual notes on a
measurement route in the map window. You can select a text and background color for the
note in the Text color and Background color fields.
397
6.36.5.33 BTS Properties dialog

Double-click a BTS file layer in the Layers side panel to open the BTS Properties dialog. With
the Reset to default properties and Use previous properties buttons you can quickly
change settings for a BTS file layer.
BTS file refers to the BTS file that is used on the map.
BTS template file defines how customer-specific BTS data is imported into Nemo Outdoor.
Please refer to chapter
Importing BTS data for more information.
If you have a BTS file that contains base stations from several systems (e.g., UMTS and
GSM), select the Draw only active system base stations option to display only base stations
from the active system, in other words, the system in which the test device is currently. The
other base stations are hidden.
Define also the size and color of the BTS icons. Note that you define a different color for active
system base stations and for other base stations.
Select the Use color set to color BTS icons when you want to distinguish between different
base stations through the use of existing and user-defined color sets.
Select a parameter from the Parameter drop-down menu based on which you want to color
base stations, and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu.
Clicking on the Edit Color Set button will lead to the Color Set Editor dialog where you can
edit existing color sets or create a new one to suit your needs. See chapter Color Set Editor for
more information on how to edit and create color sets.
398
With the Show parameter next to cell option you can hide and show a number of
parameters, such as antenna tilt and direction, routing area code and site name, on the map.
Select the Show labels option to display a label or a description next to the selected cell
information and define the Text color and Background color.
Select the Draw cell range option to view the cell range on the map. Define the degree of cell
range transparency in the Cell range transparency.
The Connected devices displays a list of devices that you can connect to the base station
sites. Note that the BTS sites will not be drawn if no device is selected.
6.36.5.34 Route Plan Properties dialog
When a route plan is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select
Layer Properties, the Route Plan Properties dialog appears. You can also view the dialog
by double-clicking on the route plan in the map side panel.
Route plan file field defines the name of the route plan you selected in the map side panel.
The Waypoint properties field allows you to define the color for the waypoint icon and the line
attaching the icons together. You can also define the icon size and line thickness in pixels.
The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route plan on the map in x and y
directions.
6.36.5.35 Map Properties dialog
In the Map Properties dialog you can define the offset (in pixels) between routes on a map.
This value is used with multi measurements where you have multiple routes which, without
offset, would overlap each other. You can also disable the default offset completely. To define
offset values for individual routes, go to the dialog and define the X and Y offset values.
399
When opening multiple measurement files for playback in Nemo Outdoor, the GPS source
from the first file is used by default for drawing the measurement route on a map. In the Map
Properties dialog, you can select the GPS source from another measurement file. This is
useful if, for example, the first file does not contain GPS data.
6.36.5.36 MapXtreme Properties dialog
Click the MapXtreme Properties button to define some MapXtreme specific properties. Note
that these settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a
MapInfo Geoset file by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window. To later open the .gst
file, click the Open Map button, select MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox, and
select a file from the list.
If you are using MapInfo® maps, you can define the appearance of the map even further by
clicking the MapXtreme Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. In the Layers tab
the table shows a list of the current layers. The order on the list defines the order in which the
layers are displayed on a map; for example, in this case the Route layer is on the top, Current
Position layer is under that, and World map is at the bottom. This utility is useful if you want to
have a bigger map on the bottom (e.g., a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a
smaller area (e.g., of Helsinki) on top of that. To add layers on the map, click Add. An Open
dialog is opened where you can choose the map you want to add as a layer. The map is
added on the list and with the Up and Down you can change the map’s position on the list. By
selecting and clearing the Visible option you can decide whether or not to display the layer on
the map. To remove layers from the map, select the layer from the list and click the Remove
button.
6.36.5.37 Textual comments
With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add
Textual Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box
can be repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-
click on the text box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the
map and select Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.
400
6.36.5.38 Tool
Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup.
Arrow tool changes the cursor back to an arrow.
Pan tool changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map.
Center tool allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point.
Zoom In and Zoom Out tools change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom
in and out using the mouse wheel and the + and - keyboard buttons.
Use the Measure Distance tool to measure the distance between multiple points on a map.
Click the Measure Distance button to activate the tool and click the Add point button.
Select the points on the map and the distance between these points is displayed on the map.
The Total distance is displayed in the left-hand panel.
401
With the Draw distance circle tool you can draw a circle where the distance between the last
two points is used as the radius.
To remove points from the map, click the Remove latest point or Remove all points buttons.
To hide the Measure Distance panel, click the Measure Distance button.
Show Scale Bar displays the scale bar in the window.
6.36.5.39 Auto center
The Auto Center tool pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible area of
the map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command
is selected.
6.36.5.40 Auto clear route
The Auto Clear Route tool automatically removes the route from the map when measurement
is stopped. If you wish to keep the route on the map when starting a new measurement,
unselect the tool.
402
6.36.5.41 Show layers list
The Layers side panel displays a list of items available on the map. They can be BTS files,
measurement routes, map layers, route history search results, etc. Double-click an item to
access its Properties dialog. You can hide and display layers by selecting and deselecting the
option next to the layer or click the X button to delete the layer. With the buttons you can add
new layers on the map.
6.36.5.42 Full screen
Selecting the Full screen item will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.
6.36.6 Color Set Editor

You can access the Color Set Editor by clicking the Edit Color Set button in the Route
Properties | Color dialog. With the Color Set Editor you can create color sets to be used in
maps and grids. In the Color Set Editor dialog you will see a list of all existing color sets. You
can sort the color sets by selecting the Type. You can also search for a color set by its name.
To edit an existing color set, double-click on the color set.
In the Color Set Properties dialog you can edit the settings for each color set.
403
Name and Short name identify the color set.

You can also type a description of the color set in the Description field.
Type defines what kind of data the color set is used with, for example, numerical, gradient or
string. The type setting can be used to sort the color sets in the Color Set Editor dialog.
With the Automatically generate missing values option you can specify colors for some
fixed values while the rest are automatically generated. This option can be used with numerical
or string type of color sets. This is especially useful with parameters with many values (e.g.
PNs and scr. code).
Values table displays the different value ranges and the colors associated with them.
Click the Add button to define the colors and limits. In the Range Properties dialog, select the
color and then the upper and lower limits of the value range. You can also write a description
for the value range. Finally click OK.
404
Click the Add Range button to quickly assign colors to parameter values. In the Add Range
dialog, define the top and bottom values and the step, i.e., how many values are represented
by the same color. Finally click OK and Nemo Outdoor will automatically assign colors for the
parameter values.
6.37 Export/import settings

It is possible to export and import various settings, Nemo Server configuration files, and
measurement lists from and to Nemo Outdoor. This function can also be used to send
configurations remotely to Nemo Outdoor from an (S)FTP server.
The Export and Import commands can be found from the Settings tab and from the File
menu.
405
6.37.1 Export settings to file

To export settings to a file, click the Export button and select Export Settings To File. Define
a name for the .aex file on your PC. The exported settings will be saved in this file.
Next, the Export Settings dialog appears. Select the items you wish to export and click OK.
The selected items are now saved in the .aex file.
6.37.2 Export settings to FTP server

To export settings to an FTP server, click the Export button and select Export Settings To
FTP Server. Define a name for the .aex file on your PC. The exported settings will be saved in
this file.
Click the FTP Options button to define settings for the FTP server. See page 414 for more
information on the settings.
Next, the Export Settings dialog appears. Select the items you wish to export, and click OK.
The selected items are now saved in the .aex file and exported to the FTP server. The
exported settings can now be downloaded from the FTP server to any Nemo Outdoor unit with
access to the server.
406
6.37.3 Import settings from file

To import settings, click the Import button and select Import Settings From File. Select the
file and click Open.
Select the settings you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.
Click OK. The selected settings and files are now saved in Nemo Outdoor and they can be
taken into use.
6.37.4 Import settings from FTP server

To import settings from an FTP server, click the Import button and select Import Settings
From FTP Server. If you have not defined any FTP server settings, the list will be empty.
When FTP server settings are defined, a list of exported setting files will appear.
Select the user parameters you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.
Click OK. The selected settings and files are now saved in Nemo Outdoor and they can be
taken into use.
407
6.37.5 Export/Import configuration files

Configuration files (.ncfb) are settings files for configuring the behavior and appearance of
Nemo Outdoor and they include color sets, color palettes, call sequences, and notifications.
You can export sets of configuration files into .ncfb files.
To export configuration files, click the Export button and select Configuration File(s).
In the Select Configuration Files dialog, define a name for the .ncfb file and select the items
that you want to export. Finally click OK.
When importing configuration files, click the Import button and select Configuration File(s).
Browse for the ncfb file and select the items that you want to import.
Please note that to import a configuration file, you need to restart Nemo Outdoor.
408
7 Ending Measurements
The measurement is being recorded when a REC text appears in the upper right corner of the
main window. Follow these instructions to stop the measurement.
To end measurements:
1. If you are using a script to perform the measurement, you can either wait until the
script file has been executed or interrupt the script by clicking the Stop Script button
in the ribbon.
2. If you are performing measurements manually, the measurement process is
terminated either by clicking the Stop button in the ribbon. All the ongoing calls will be
stopped and scanning will be terminated. Data transfers will be stopped, PDP context
will be deactivated, and GPRS detach will be performed.
3. Nemo Outdoor will display a report window with some call statistics. At this point, you
can choose if you would like to save this file or delete it. You can also start a playback
of this file.
When carrying out measurements using a script, stopping the measurement is not
recommended while a test call is on. Always wait until the end of the call, then select
Measurement | Stop Script or click the Stop button to end the measurement. If the
measurement is stopped while the test call is on, it may affect the Quality Survey
Report values. The Call Length from the TCH assignment percentage in this report
might indicate calls to be shorter than they actually were.
409
7.1 Measurement report
The Measurement Report dialog is displayed when recording is stopped. The dialog displays
some statistics from the measurement.
Select the Save statistics to file option to save the statistics to a separate Excel .csv file. The
filename is the same as for the actual measurement file and the file is located in the Results
folder.
Select the Send measurement results to server option to send the log files to a server. See
chapter Uploading measurement files to server for more information.
Select the Compress measurement file(s) option to automatically compress the files below
into a single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are compressed, the original files
are deleted.
• measurement files (.nmf)
• binary files (.nbl)
• packet capture files (.pcap)
• marker files (.mrk)
• indoor map files (.tab and image)
Select the Include packet capture logs option to include packet capture logs in the
measurement file upload.
410
To save the measurement file under another name, click the Rename button and type a new
file name in the field that appears. To delete the file without saving, click the Delete button.
Click the Attach button to add an attachment to the measurement file. The Compress
measurement file(s) option needs to be selected first. The attachment can be some additional
information about the tested site, such as a photo of the site.
Click the Playback button to playback the measurement file immediately. To save the file, click
Save.
Note that if you press Esc on your computer’s keyboard, or click on the button on
the dialog, you will save the measurement file just as if you had clicked on the Save
button.
Click the Analyze button to open the measurement file for analysis in Nemo Analyze.
Note that this requires that you have Nemo Analyze installed on the same computer
where Nemo Outdoor is installed.
In the Export to Nemo Analyze dialog, select a workbook where the data is opened and/or a
report template that is used for creating a report from the data. If you do not select a workbook
or a report, the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database without starting
Nemo Analyze. Finally click Export.
411
8 Measurement Results
This section guides you on viewing and analyzing the measurement results produced by Nemo
Outdoor, and explains how measurement files are uploaded to an FTP server.
The measurement process produces one or more output files at a time, depending on whether
you have been using a mobile and a scanner at the same time or just one device at a time.
The file name can be user defined but Nemo Outdoor always decides the extension part. If you
change the file name manually, the file name format should be xxxx.1.nmf where the number
refers to the device number.
8.1 Analyzing measurement results

The measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor can be viewed and analyzed, for
example, with:
• Nemo Outdoor Playback functions
• Nemo Analyze
• Nemo WindCatcher
• Text editor
• Spreadsheet software such as Microsoft® Excel
Mapping software via conversion utilities provided by Keysight.
8.2 Playing back measurement files

Playback is a handy tool for making a quick analysis of measurements. You can playback files
anytime and anywhere immediately after the measurement has been finished or later on.
When you open a file for playback, Nemo Outdoor will deactivate all connected devices. Nemo
Outdoor will ask if you would like to save the current device. If you answer Yes, Nemo Outdoor
will save the current configuration and reactivate the devices that you had connected before
the playback when you close the playback file(s).
To open files for playback, select File  Open Measurement and select the measurement
files.
The Home tab in the ribbon will be updated with the Playback tools.
The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays the progress of the playback. There
is also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement.
8.2.1 Viewing and moving markers

You can use the grid window to view the markers you have inserted in a measurement file
during measurements. After a file has been loaded, select the Play command from the
Playback menu or click the Play button on the tool bar.
Open a marker grid from Data Windows | New Grid | User Markers.
412
The grid window will display all the markers that you have inserted in the file during
measurements. Click on any of the markers in the grid window, and all the other open windows
will display the same point of time.
Markers are also displayed on the Indoor map along with the marker number. You can move
the markers by selecting a marker from the list (click the index number) and pressing the Move
button. Place the red pin to the new location on the map. The new longitude and latitude
information is saved in the marker file.
8.2.2 Closing playback files

After playback, you need to close the playback file. Select File | Close Measurement. If you
saved the current device configuration when you started the playback, Nemo Outdoor will ask
if you would like to load the same device(s).
413
8.3 Uploading measurement files to server

You can upload measurement files from Nemo Outdoor for storage or post-processing via the
Nemo Outdoor user interface. Files are transferred in the background.
For the file upload, select a network interface that is not used for measurements so
that the file upload does not affect test results.
Select File | Send Measurement to Server. First select the server type from the bottom left
corner of the dialog and then select the measurement files. Click Next.
The contents of the Send Options dialog depend on the selected server type: FTP, HTTPS,
Nemo Xynergy, Dropbox, or Nemo Cloud.
The files are uploaded in the background and you can monitor the upload status from the File
Transfer Status view (select View – File Transfer Status).
414
8.3.1 Send Options - FTP
Define the server address, username, and password and the name of the Remote folder,
i.e. folder in which the measurement files are sent on the server.
Select the Use secure protocol option to send the measurement files using HTTPS protocol.
415
Select the Use passive mode option to send the measurement files using passive mode.
When the Move local files to “Sent” folder after upload option is selected, the
measurement files are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your
computer after the transfer. You can also change this default destination in User Interface
Properties | Paths | Measurements.
The file transfer can be performed using the default Internet connection, via a user-selected
dial-up connection, via mobile broadband, or via a network interface.
When uploading measurement files while performing measurements, select a network

interface that is not used for measurements so that the file upload does not affect test
results.
When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and
Password fields will become active.
After configuring the settings, click Finish. The measurement file(s) are sent to the server.
8.3.2 Send Options - HTTPS
Define the server address, autouser (username), and password and the name of the
Remote folder, i.e. folder in which the measurement files are sent on the server.
416
Click the Test Connection button to check that the settings are configured correctly and the
connection is working. Select the Allow ping connection check option to first use Ping for the
connection test after which Nemo Outdoor will test the configured HTTP connection.
The file transfer can be performed using the default Internet connection, via a user-selected
dial-up connection, via mobile broadband, or via a network interface.
When uploading measurement files while performing measurements, select a network

interface that is not used for measurements so that the file upload does not affect test
results.
After configuring the settings, click Finish. The measurement file(s) are sent to the server. The
URL from which the file can be loaded is displayed for each uploaded file. URLs can be easily
copied and distributed e.g. by email.
8.3.3 Send Options - Nemo Xynergy
Define the username, password, and URI and click the Refresh button. Nemo Outdoor will
connect with the Nemo Xynergy server. After the connection has been established, you will be
able to define the project type (acceptance, benchmarking, inbuilding, or optimization), and
other parameters, such as market, venue, building, and cluster, depending on the selected
project type. You can also add new clusters and projects.
417
Select the Building ready or Floor ready options to notify Nemo Xynergy when the
measurements for an entire building or a floor are ready, and files uploaded. The options are
available only when inbuilding is selected as the project type.
With Advanced Options you can define more detailed processing options for the data. The
contents of this dialog depend on the selected project type.
Import Log option. This is to import all the chipset logs into the processed Xynergy Dataset.
These imported chipset messages will show in the layer 3 message window on Xynergy Map
view.
Import Packet Trace option. This is to import the TCP/IP/SIP/RTP (IP Layer 3 information)
messages into the processed Nemo Xynergy dataset. These imported messages will show in
the layer 3 message window on Nemo Xynergy Map view.
Packet Trace Analysis option. This is a mandatory setting to process VoLTE data.
GPS Interpolation option. Interpolate measurements for areas with no actual measurements.
Mostly used for in building purposes.
File Options - File Group option. When the option is enabled, you can define a file group for
each uploaded measurement file (device) and the file groups are implemented as subfolders
under the Nemo Xynergy project file during the data upload. Define a subfolder for each
measurement file (device).
418
Note that file grouping cannot be used simultaneously with the MO-MT processing
option.
When uploading inbuilding measurements, click Yes in the Do you want to mark building as
ready for reporting? message box when you have uploaded all files from a building and wish
to start running reports for the building.
8.3.4 Send Options - Dropbox
User access token is required for Dropbox testing. Click the Get Access Token button. You
will be redirected to the Dropbox login page. Enter your account information and click Sign In.
You will return to Nemo Outdoor and an access token will appear in the field.
419
Remote folder defines the name and location of the destination folder that is on the Dropbox
server.
The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection, via a user-selected
data connection, or using mobile broadband.
8.3.5 Send Options - Nemo Cloud

Before sending files to Nemo Cloud, you will need to define Nemo Cloud settings. Go to the
Nemo Cloud tab in the main view and select Settings.
Please note that this function requires the Nemo Cloud Basic or Nemo Cloud
Premium license option.
Define the Nemo Cloud account settings and click OK.
420
Now you can send files to Nemo Cloud. Select File | Send Measurement to Server. First
select Nemo Cloud from the bottom left corner of the dialog and then select the measurement
files. Click Finish. The files are sent.
421
8.4 Exporting measurements

With the Export Measurements (File | Export Measurements) functionality, it is possible to
export measurement files from Nemo File Format to MapInfo or .csv formats. You can also
export individual measurements through the Measurement report dialog when you are ending
measurements.
The Export Measurements dialog is opened.
422
Template contains a predefined set of parameters and parameter rules for export. To create a
new template, select New in the Template field and type a name for the template. Then select
the parameters that will be exported and define parameter rules. When you export the
parameters, the settings are saved. The saved template will be available in the Template field
the next time you open the Export Measurements dialog.
With the Add Measurement and Add Folder buttons you can add individual measurement
files or entire folders containing measurement files to be exported.
Export format defines the format in which the files are stored.
Number of values per parameter defines the maximum number of values exported for
parameters that can have multiple values.
Select the Do not export measurement names option to exclude measurement file name
from export.
Select Use marker coordinates when exporting indoor measurements. The marker file needs
to be stored in the same folder as the measurement file.
Export interval defines at what rate (in seconds or meters) parameter values are sampled
from the measurement data for export. If you select all, all data is exported.
By default, multiple values of the same parameter are exported in a single column. To create a
separate column for each value, select the Separate values to columns option.
With the Export files to folder option, the individual files will be saved in a folder. Also define
the Target folder.
With the Export to single file option, the selected files will be stored in a single .tab file.
Click the Select Parameters button to define which parameters will be included in the export.
Select a parameter from the list of available parameters and with the arrow button move it to
the right. The selected parameters will be exported.
You can also make more rules for selecting parameter values for export. Only those parameter
values that meet the rule will be exported. Click the Edit Rules button.
423
Click the + button to add a new rule. Select a parameter and define the operator and value for
the parameter. You can define as many rules as you wish. Finally click OK.
With the Add Parameter functionality user can export some hidden/custom parameters that
are not available for exporting. Enter the Nemo Outdoor internal parameter name and click
OK. The OK button is activated when a valid parameter name is entered.
When you have selected all parameters to be exported, click OK.
424
8.5 Device Capability Reader

The Device Capability Reader provides easy access to test device capability information. You
can upload a measurement file or files and the Device Capability Reader will process the files
and show a set of information of the devices used in the measurement. The device capabilities
differ based on region and service provider so with the Device Capability Reader you can
easily check the actual device capabilities at the time of the measurement.
Connect devices to Nemo Outdoor or open a measurement file in Nemo Outdoor and click the
Device Capability button in the Home tab. The device information opens in a grid view. Right-
click on the view, for example, to change the font size and to save the device capability data
as an HTML file.
425
9 User Interface
The ribbon contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. The commands are arranged in tabs. You
can minimize and maximize the ribbon from the small arrow in the top right corner.
Under the File button, you will find more commands.
426
Under the ? button you will find more useful tools.
Online Help opens this user guide.

Nemo File Format opens the Nemo File Format Specification document.
Nemo Outdoor KPI List opens a list of KPIs supported by Nemo Outdoor.
Shortcut Guide displays a complete list of shortcut keys available in Nemo Outdoor. This
window can also be displayed by pressing down the F2 key when using Nemo Outdoor.
License Information displays information about your Nemo Outdoor license, e.g. which options
are enabled and the expiration date.
9.1 View groups

View Groups is a function that allows you to organize measurement windows into different
tabs for easier viewing. This is especially useful if you have several graphs and maps open at
the same time and you have to overlap them to fit them all in the Nemo Outdoor main window.
Now you can create view groups and organize the measurement windows into several groups.
Each view group appears at the bottom of the main window as a tab that you can view by
clicking the tab. You can reorganize the tabs by dragging a tab to its new place in the row.
When you start Nemo Outdoor for the first time, you will have one default view group. To
rename the default view group, right-click on the tab and select Rename. Enter a name for the
view group and click OK.
To create a new view group, right-click on the empty area next to the existing view groups, and
select Create New. Enter a name for the view group and click OK. The new view group
appears as another tab.
To organize measurement windows into the view groups, open a view group, for example,
Maps, and open the windows that you would like to have in this particular view group. Then go
to another view group by clicking on the respective tab, for example, Graphs and open
measurement windows there. The windows are automatically saved in the view groups and will
be opened the next time you start Nemo Outdoor.
To copy the contents of an existing view group to a new view group, right-click on the view
group label and select Copy to New View Group. Type a name for the new view group and
select the device for which the data is displayed.
427
If you need to change the device for which the views in a particular view group are displaying
data, right-click the view group label and select Select Device. Select the device from the list.
All the views in the view group will be updated to display data from the selected device.
9.2 Status bar

The status bar at the bottom of the Nemo Outdoor window gives you variable information
depending on the operations you are performing. For example, when you are pointing to a
toolbar button with the mouse (without clicking), the status bar will show a description of the
corresponding function. You can also see a brief description of the same function in a help box
that appears next to the button when you hold the mouse over the button long enough. There
is also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement.
In the View tab, you can select to hide the status bar; this will bring more space to the other
objects in the main window.
9.3 Parameters view

The Parameters view offers an easy way to open data views for a certain parameter. Click on
a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on a graph. Alternatively, right-click
on the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select the graph type (line
graph, vertical bar, map, indoor view, etc.) from the menu.
428
Parameters can also be opened for several devices at once. First, press down the Ctrl button
and select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the
parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select the graph type from the menu.
Move your mouse pointer on top of a parameter in the Parameters view, and the tooltip will
display more information about that particular parameter. The tooltip text can also be copied to
clipboard.
A search string can be used to search parameters, parameter short names and possible alias
names.
9.4 Customizing the ribbon and quick access toolbar

Nemo Outdoor ribbon bar is fully customizable. To edit the ribbon, right-click on the ribbon and
select Customize Quick Access Toolbar.
429
9.5 Nemo Outdoor windows

The windows in Nemo Outdoor are highly user configurable. Different network parameters and
events can be viewed as line graphs, bars, and dots. To make the measuring process easier
for first-time users, Nemo Outdoor offers some ready-made custom windows that include
some essential windows for specific types of measuring. The users are also able to make their
own custom windows and save them for later use.
9.5.1 Custom windows

Nemo Outdoor offers a selection of premade graphs and grids which can be quickly accessed
through Data Windows | Custom Windows | Open. The custom windows are grouped under
the corresponding graph and grid types.
You can view the existing custom windows sorted by type (graph, grid, map, indoor view) or by
technology (AMPS, CDMA, GSM, UMTS, etc.). Select the custom window you would like to
open from the table on the right and click Open.
You can also save your own custom windows. When you have set up a graph view that you
would like to use later on, activate the window that you would like to save and select Data
Windows | Custom Windows | Save. Nemo Outdoor will ask you to type a name for the new
custom window. After clicking OK, the window is added to the custom windows list. If you want
to remove some custom windows, select the custom window that you want to remove and click
the Delete button.
430
9.5.2 Devices view
431
The Devices view offers easy access to the most common commands and configuration
dialogs. The view displays all devices connected to Nemo Outdoor and the device-specific
commands. By double-clicking the various items in the view, you can access the related
configuration dialogs. For example, double-click the FTP item to access the FTP Transfer
Properties dialog.
It is also possible to select multiple devices (Ctrl+left-click) and define settings that will be
applied to all selected devices. For example, if the same APN is used with several devices,
you can select the devices and define the APN for all devices at one go. When you have
selected multiple devices, you can only edit settings that are supported by all the selected
devices.
From the Supported Data Protocols list, select the data protocol (FTP, SMTP, TCP/UDP,
etc.) used in the measurements.
Description
Measurement control button offers access to
some commands that are supported by the
selected device, such as, start/stop voice call,
start new data transfer, SMS/MMS message
sending.
Measurement settings button offers access to
configuration and properties dialogs. The
selection is device-specific.
Device connection settings button opens the
Device Configuration dialog (see
Configuration Manager - Devices).
Device notification settings button opens the
Measurement Properties - Notifications page
for the selected device.
Device script settings button opens the
Measurement Properties - Script page for the
selected device.
Start/stop script state for selected devices
starts/stops the script.
Group devices button organizes the devices in
the view according to type, measurement
server, or operator.
432
9.5.3 Device Status view
The Device Status view displays the device status for all connected devices. The green light at
the upper left corner is blinking whenever the device is active and connected. The symbols
next to the device name indicate the device status. Hover your mouse on the icons to view
more detailed information.
Right-click on the Device Status view and select Reorder Devices to change the order of the
devices in the Device Status and Devices views. Drag and drop the devices in the correct
order and finally click OK.
You can also define what information is shown in the Device Status View. Right-click the view
and select View or Configure.
433
9.5.4 Output window
The Output window displays program messages and textual notifications. Icons ( )
next to the timestamps clarify the type of message or notification in question. For example, the
speech bubble indicates a normal message, the orange flag a warning, the red flag an error
message, and the exclamation mark a notification. The window can be opened by choosing
View | Output. You can clear the Output window by right-clicking on the window and selecting
Clear Window from the popup menu.
9.5.5 Script Status window
Note that since you cannot use scripts with scanners, this window is also not
available when making scanner measurements.
From the Script Status window you can follow the progress of the script file used in the current
measurement.
434
10 Troubleshooting
This section describes some of the possible problem situations that may occur in Nemo
Outdoor.
10.1 Low throughput

In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party
applications, read this chapter for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP
based protocols.
In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party
applications, the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters.
For example, low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicates an area of
bad coverage or high interference. Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage
ratio) points to capacity, server or transmission problems.
In LTE networks, observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio
(SNR). PRB affects throughput directly. Values less than maximum may indicate other users in
the cell, a bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application
does not need all the available bandwidth).
Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that
there are other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the
network that prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput.
High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage.
When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation, average BLER (PDSCH BLER)
should be higher than 0, typically 10-20%, in order to achieve the gain of HARQ
retransmission scheme
Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. Higher values indicate that the
radio link is about to drop. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values.
Other things that could help troubleshooting:
• Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput. Some
HSPA USB interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window
size settings in registry.
• Disable IP capturing from Measurement Properties – Measurement page..
• Try another FTP server for comparison.
• Command prompt FTP throughput. This comparison is recommended because
command prompt FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard
methods. For better results, keep Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the
mobile network while making the transfers. Also try different servers.
• For Nemo Outdoor 5.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP
transfers to see if the throughput increases. Does not work manually, script is always
needed.
• For Nemo Outdoor 5.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP
protocol to test simultaneous transfers. Works also manually.
435
10.1.1 All Windows versions

How to check the TCP window size from packet logs:
Using Wireshark:
Check the .pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer.
Window size value tells the current TCP window size used.
Using Nemo Outdoor:

1. Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor.
2. Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0:
3. Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Look at the Tcp tree. Window shows
the current value.
Using debug logs (for developers, help desk, etc.):

1. Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function.
• TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry.
• TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. Set to default.
• TCP Auto-Tuning detected. Window size not set. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-
tuning TCP window.
2. A measurement file does not save window size info. Packet log and/or debug log is
always needed.
Windows does not use static window sizes from the registry. They rely on dynamic window
size which is handled by TCP auto-tuning feature. However, if the same registry value that XP
uses is set, Nemo Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value.
In most cases, the registry has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface
driver/software. This registry entry can be removed.
If TCP auto-tuning is disabled, Windows will limit the window size to 64 KB even if the value
has been configured to be higher from Nemo Outdoor.
How to check TCP auto-tuning state:
436
1. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field.
2. Type ”netsh interface tcp show global”
3. Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state.
Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings.
4. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field. Right-
click and select Run as administrator.
437
5. To disable auto-tuning type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled”. This
limits the TCP window size to 64KB.
6. To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses, type “netsh
interface tcp set global autotuning=highlyrestricted”.
7. Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations:
• disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window. Limits to 64 KB (65535).
• highlyrestricted: Recommended. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its
default value, very conservatively.
• restricted: Recommended. Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window
beyond its default value.
• normal: Default value. Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most
conditions.
• experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios
(not recommended, it can degrade performance in common scenarios, only intended
for research purposes). It enables receive window values of over 16 MB.
10.2 Cannot add devices

If the Add button is deactivated in the Configuration Manager window when you start Nemo
Outdoor, your version of Nemo Outdoor is an unlicensed evaluation version. Please, see
chapter Licensing for more information.
If the HASP USB key is plugged in and the Add button is deactivated, check that recording is
not on. Also, playback should be stopped and playback files closed (File | Close
Measurement).
10.3 Required license option missing

If the error message below appears, your copy protection dongle is missing a license option. In
other words, the measurement device supports technologies or features that require additional
license options. For example, if you are measuring with an LTE-A Cat 6 device and you have
purchased the LTE license instead of the LTE-A license, you can use the device with Nemo
Outdoor/Nemo Invex II but the LTE-A parameters will be missing. Please contact Nemo
Technical Support (nemo support@keysight.com) if you wish to purchase the additional
license options.
438
10.4 Cannot make calls/packet transfers

If the commands are inactive in the Measurement control menu , check that you have
devices online.
10.5 Measurement file checksum notification

Measurement file has a checksum that detects modifications to the measurement file after the
measurement is stopped. The checksum is validated when loading measurement files for
playback. The user is notified by the Nemo Outdoor user interface when opening a
measurement file where modification is detected. However, measurement files are still opened
normally. The last line in the measurement file is HASH events including time stamp and
checksum information.
#HASH,14:46:49.262,1,"0360D938749FFE82B15545D3E55B75C0"
Measurement files made with Nemo Outdoor 5.4 or earlier do not include checksum
information and the notification is always prompted when such a file is opened with Nemo
Outdoor version 5.50 or later.
10.6 Number of USB devices exceeded

With new laptops an error may occur when six or more USB devices are connected to the
laptop.
The current of the USB hub used by the laptop exceeds the max. value per device and the
driver blocks additional devices. This applies especially to the USB 3.0 host controllers based
on the Intel chipset.
The issue can be fixed by uninstalling the Intel USB 3.0 host controller driver.
Note that especially with Lenovo computers, the driver is automatically installed
with system updates. Automated updates should be disabled.
439
11 Shortcut Keys
This is a complete list of the shortcut keys available in Nemo Outdoor. This window can be
displayed by pressing down the F2 key when using Nemo Outdoor.
440
12 Notification Icons
Below are described the default notification icons.
441
13 Appendix 1 - Making MapInfo® raster maps

Using raster image files, you can bring paper maps, photographs, and other graphic images
into MapInfo®. You can scan paper maps and then use paper maps as the foundation for the
maps you create in MapInfo®. After scanning the paper map into a raster image file, you can
display it in a map window.
Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze support .TIF, .GIF, and .JPG formats. MapInfo® can read
the following types of raster images:
• filename.TIF
• filename.GIF
• filename.JPG
• filename.PCX
• filename.BMP
• filename.BIL
Color options are:
• Monochrome images: each pixel in a map image can be black or white.
• Gray scale images: each pixel in a gray scale image can be black, white, or a shade of
gray.
• Color images: each pixel can be of any color from a palette of available colors.
MapInfo® supports 256 colors. When using Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze, we
recommend using gray scale images. By doing this, the measurement route can be
discerned better than with color map images.
13.1 Registering a raster map with MapInfo® SW

If you want to overlay vector data on top of a raster image, then you must register the raster
map image so that MapInfo® can position it properly in a Map window. You do this in the
Image Registration Dialog. You must identify control point coordinates and the projection of the
raster image map. It is important to provide accurate control point information when registering
a raster map image. Choose control points that can be easily identified and selected, such as
street intersections or use the coordinates (latitude and longitude grid) for the selected point
from a paper map.
To register a raster map:

1. Start the MapInfo® software. Choose File | Open Table and Raster Image File
Format. Select your raster map image file (.TIF, .GIF, .JPG) and open it. The Image
Registration Dialog is displayed. A preview of the raster map image appears on the
screen.
2. Select the Projection button to specify the projection of the raster image map. If you
do not know the right projection, the default value is Longitude/ Latitude.
442
3. Start adding control points. Click on a location in the preview (raster image map). The
Add Control Point Dialog is displayed showing the location of the point in pixels. Add
Map X and Map Y coordinates in decimal formats. For example, to specify the
coordinates 65 degrees, 30 minutes, enter 65.5 degrees. Use negative numbers when
specifying west and south coordinates. If you want to register a raster map that does
not use longitude and latitude coordinates, specify the appropriate projection in the
Image Registration Dialog. Enter your coordinates in the native units of the coordinate
system. For example, if you are registering a UTM map image, enter coordinates in
meters. Using the MapBasic® program, you can convert d/m/s coordinates into
decimal degrees format, or the conversion from d/m/s to decimal degrees is as
follows: degrees+(minutes/60)+(seconds/3600)=decimal degrees
4. You must choose at least three control points. Select points that can be easily
identified and selected in the map window.
5. After all control points have been defined, click OK in the Image Registration dialog.
The raster map will be displayed in the map window.
6. Move filename.tab and filename.tif/gif/jpg files to the map directory of Nemo Outdoor
or Nemo Analyze.
7. Open filename.tab in Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze.
443
14 Appendix 2 - CDMA settings and PRL editing in Nemo Outdoor

You can access CDMA Settings and the PRL editing dialog in Nemo Outdoor through Device
Settings .
In the NV items page you are able to read and write nonvolatile memory items.
You need to know your SPC before you can program any of the following settings. A known
SPC can also be overwritten by this plugin.
Directory number defines a phone number
444
MIN1 defines a seven-digit phone number of the terminal

MIN2 defines a three-digit area code
SPC defines the service programming code
IMSI = IMSI_MCC + IMSI_11_12 + MIN1 + MIN2
On the PRL page you can read and write PRL items. This can be used to load any previously
saved PRL’s onto any Qualcomm-based mobile. You can also use this feature to save a PRL
from a connected phone and then use this later to load the same PRL onto a new mobile.
On the DIP Switch page you are able to enable/disable the listed features.
445
Should you need to manually edit a PRL, you can use the Presto tool which can be
downloaded from CDG.org. The download page can be accessed by searching for “prl” using
the search tool on the main page.
Click on the prltools.asp link to get to the downloads page.
446
From there you can download the toolbar suite and the tutorial for it. Install the suite when
launched. This will add a tool bar called “Presto” to MS Excel.
Run the Setup.exe file. Click Install in the dialog that appears.
Click Next in the PRL Toolbar Suite dialog that appears.
Click Next in the Welcome window.

Select I Agree in the License Agreement dialog, and click Next.
Click Next to confirm installation.
Click Close to exit the Installation Finished dialog.
447
Next, open Presto by going to Start | All Programs | QUALCOMM PRL Toolbar Suite |
PRESTO. It should look as follows in Excel:
448
15 Customer Support
If you have questions on or beyond this documentation about Nemo tools, please contact our
technical support service through Nemo Support Portal at http://nemo.support.keysight.com,
call us or send us an email at nemo.support@keysight.com. Note that for full support you need
to have the Maintenance Agreement.
15.1 Nemo Support Portal

Nemo Support Portal is a web interface for technical support, product-related questions, and
RMA requests. It offers a fast and convenient way to reach our technical support team and
submit repair, warranty repair, and calibration requests. Customers can open a support ticket,
follow the status of existing tickets, and request technical support 24/7/365. Furthermore, the
Nemo Support Portal includes a Knowledge Base for the most frequent and latest topics on
Nemo Products. Submitting a ticket via Nemo Support Portal ensures that our technical
specialists have all the necessary information available to solve your support case, resulting in
faster response times.
Please go to http://nemo.support.keysight.com to access the portal and click Request access
to obtain a password to the system.
15.2 Phone and email support

During the warranty period, the phone support related to potential software errors is free of
additional charge. Registered users with a valid Maintenance Agreement are entitled to full
support. For a list of service locations, please visit http://www.keysight.com/find/assist
Nemo Support Portal is the preferred channel for technical support requests, but you can also
send us an email to nemo.support@keysight.com. When emailing, please let us know the
number of your Software Maintenance and Support Agreement.
15.3 Locations for Keysight Technologies

Online assistance: http://www.keysight.com/find/assist
Should the Declaration of Conformity be required, please contact a Keysight Sales

Representative, or the closest Keysight Sales Office. Alternately, contact Keysight at:
www.keysight.com.
449
This information is subject to change without notice.
© Keysight Technologies 2018-2021
Published in USA, October 2021
NTA00000A-90012

Nemo Outdoor 9.10 User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nemo Outdoor 9.10 User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Keysight Nemo Outdoor

1 Quick Guide ............................................................................................................................................... 10

5 Configuration Settings ........................................................................................................................... 44

6.7.6 Test sample requirements .................................................................................. 112

6.19 Indoor mode ...............................................................................................................235

6.29 Missing neighbor detection ........................................................................................313

8.2 Playing back measurement files ................................................................................412

1.1 Setting up the system

Installing and running Nemo Outdoor requires administrator rights.

1.2 Using Nemo Outdoor

1.2.1 Using Nemo Outdoor with command line options

2 Before You Begin

2.1.1 Technical support expiration

2.2.1 Local laws and regulations

2.2.2 Nemo Outdoor laptop settings

2.2.2.2 Active protection system

2.2.2.3 USB hub properties

2.2.3 Traffic safety

2.2.4 Operating environment

3 Nemo Outdoor System Overview

3.1 Voice testing

3.2 Circuit-switched data testing

3.3 Packet-switched data testing

3.4 Nemo Active Testing Application (NATA)

3.4.1 Installing NATA

3.4.2 Updating the NATA SW and license

Confirm by selecting Load.

3.4.3 Low data throughput with NATA

3.4.4 TeamViewer QuickSupport for NATA

3.4.5 Local NATA software updates

3.4.6 NATA IMS video call quality option license

3.5 Nemo Carrying Case

3.6 Nemo Network Benchmarking Solution

3.7 Indoor measurements

4 Installing Nemo Outdoor System

4.1 Hardware and software requirements

4.2 Other hardware requirements

4.3 Nemo Outdoor software installation

To uninstall Nemo Outdoor:

4.4 Over-the-air SW updates

Valid technical support and maintenance agreement is required. If technical

4.5 Nemo Outdoor device set-up

4.5.1 Connecting a GPS receiver

4.5.2 Connecting a scanner

4.5.3 Connecting voice quality devices

Nemo Handy firmware is required on the test phone.

4.6 Nemo Invex device set-up

4.6.1 Nemo Invex Status view

4.6.2 Multiple data connections on one measurement server

4.7 General guidelines for drive testing

Check the configuration before starting the measurement.

5.1 Configuring Nemo Outdoor

5.1.1 Configuration through Welcome page

5.1.2 Configuration through Load Device Configuration dialog

5.1.3 Configuring Nemo Outdoor manually

5.1.4 Use case 1. Start measurements automatically upon device startup

5.2 Configuring test mobiles

5.3 Configuration Manager

5.3.1 Configuration Manager - Handler information

5.3.2 Configuration Manager - User interface

5.3.2.1 User Interface Properties – General

%a Abbreviated weekday name

• 9-15 devices: 10000

5.3.2.4 User Interface Properties – Paths